Carrera's Language Learning. English Book For Spanish Speakers (Full Version)

ENGLISH BOOK FOR
SPANISH SPEAKERS
Complete Series
CARRERAS
LANGUAGE
LEARNING
Autor:
Jos Francisco Carrera Papaterra
josefcarrera@gmail.com
Venezolano. Actualmente: Sdney, Australia
Primera Edicin
Valencia Carabobo, Venezuela
Julio, 2010
Segunda Edicin
Sdney, Australia. Abril, 2016
Derechos de Autor Reservados
Registrado en el Centro Nacional del Libro - Venezuela
Derechos de Propiedad Reservados para el Autor
II
LA IMPORTANCIA DEL IDIOMA INGLS

Hoy ms que nunca resulta imprescindible aprender ingls. Cada da se
emplea ms en casi todas las reas del conocimiento y desarrollo humanos.
Prcticamente puede afirmarse que se trata de la lengua del mundo actual. Es, en la
era de la globalizacin, la gran lengua internacional, una lingua franca que ha
repercutido en todos los pases no-anglosajones, incluida Espaa, y que afecta ms o
menos directamente a los diversos campos y profesiones. Su posesin ya no puede
tratarse como un lujo, sino que es una necesidad evidente. Es ms, incluso se dice ya
que quien no domine esa lengua estara en una clara situacin de desventaja: sera
como si fuese mudo o medio analfabeta. Y sobran las razones para decirlo. La
pretensin de esta serie de tres libros es la de hacer verla enorme importancia de
adquirir dicho idioma y ensear a personas de todas las edades como manejar las
herramientas para que dominen en su totalidad y con eficacia las habilidades
habladas, escritas, ledas y escuchadas y logren emplearlas con facilidad en cualquier
situacin, haciendo posible la comunicacin clara y precisa.
En consecuencia, se trata de la herramienta que permite la comunicacin con
personas de otros pases, dentro del mundo globalizado en que vivimos. Es
indiscutible que el ingls se ha convertido en el idioma global de comunicacin por
excelencia, uno de los de mayor uso en el mundo. Es idioma oficial, o tiene un status
especial, en unos 75 territorios en todo el mundo. Dentro de poco ms de una dcada
lo hablarn tres mil millones de personas, es decir, la mitad de la humanidad. Las
consecuencias del avance de esta marea lingstica son inmedibles. Dentro de pocas
generaciones y por primera vez en la historia del homo sapiens, la mayor parte de
nuestra especie ser capaz de comunicarse en una sola lengua.
Se trata del mayor golpe a la civilizacin, a nivel mundial, durante el ltimo
cuarto de siglo. En casi todas las partes del mundo la mayora habla al menos un
poco de ingls, de modo que en casi todos lados, quien lo conozca, podra sobrevivir.
Esta expansin supone un verdadero terremoto en la historia del ser humano, uno de
los hechos ms importantes que le han ocurrido a la humanidad desde el nacimiento
del lenguaje. Ninguna lengua antes haba alcanzado la universalidad, ni haba llegado
tan lejos ni tan rpido. Es la primera vez en la historia que resulta posible sealar una
lengua como la predominante.
Por consenso mundial, el ingls ha sido elegido como el idioma de la
comunicacin internacional. Es la lengua de la diplomacia, en un mundo global en el
que las relaciones entre pases son cada vez de mayor importancia.
III
Hoy en da, cualquier investigador o profesional que quiera estar al da o

acceder a libros especializados necesita irremediablemente saber ingls para estar
informado de los rpidos avances que estn teniendo lugar en su rea de
conocimiento, y ello es as porque el 75% de la bibliografa cientfica est en ingls.
Este hecho tambin abarca a otros contenidos proporcionados por los distintos
medios informativos existentes como televisin, radio, peridicos, vdeos, pelculas,
entre otros.
Igualmente es indispensable conocer el ingls cuando se viaja o se sale de
vacaciones al extranjero: para ir de compras, para tomar un medio de transporte sin
perderse, para pedir la cuenta en un restaurante, para entrar en contacto con la gente
y su cultura de modo amplio... No importa a qu lugar se vaya, si se habla ingls se
tienen muchas probabilidades de encontrar a otra persona que tambin lo hable, algo
que podra sacar de apuros en ms de una ocasin.
Por ello ha habido una rapidsima proliferacin en el inters de personas en
dominar el idioma ingls. Cada ao se conceden numerosas becas para el aprendizaje
en el extranjero. Adems, habra que mencionar tambin todos los viajes e
intercambios que se organizan a Gran Bretaa, los Estados Unidos y Canad,
principalmente, tanto por iniciativa estatal como privada, para la realizacin de
cursos de perfeccionamiento. Evidentemente, todo este despliegue no es producto de
la casualidad, sino una clara muestra de la innegable importancia del ingls.
As pues, su dominio se ha convertido en una necesidad cada vez ms
apremiante. Se trata, en definitiva, de una lengua que todos, hemos de aceptar. Y
nunca es tarde para aprenderla!
Jos F. Carrera P.
Escritor y Autor de la serie de libros
para aprender ingls:
CarrerasLanguageLearning
IV
CLAVES PARA DOMINAR EL IDIOMA
Personalmente, pienso que el ingls se aprende paulatinamente durante los

estudios y maduracin de la persona. Constantemente ocurre que el estudiante no se
siente motivado al darse cuenta que no entiende lo que le dicen o que no puede
comunicar lo que desea, esto ocurre los primeros tres meses de estudios. Durante ese
tiempo, se ha visto cierta cantidad de gramtica importante y suficiente para expresar
ideas y situaciones simples, pero el estudiante no ha aprendido a realizar las
conexiones entre diferentes partes de la gramtica del idioma tan necesarias para
hablar y comunicarse con libertad. He aqu un punto muy importante que deseo
destacarles, en el presente libro, como en cualquier otro, se divide la enseanza del
idioma en unidades, las cuales van de la ms simple y necesaria a la ms compleja o
no tan comunes al hablar. A medida que se cubren las unidades del libro, se va
aprendiendo diferentes partes gramaticales del ingls, pero al hablar de un idioma,
todo est conectado entre si, por lo que cada unidad est completamente relaciona
con las dems, y para lograr expresar lo que desees de cualquier manera, te ves
obligado a utilizar partes gramaticales aprendidas en el libro en diferentes momentos
en una misma oracin, logrando as una conversacin fluida.
Una vez que ya se est en nivel intermedio bajo y teniendo en cuenta las
conexiones que se debe realizar entre partes gramaticales del idioma, debes
concentrarte en tu motivacin y necesidad de aprenderlo, utilizando estas emociones
a tu favor para que te ayuden a dominar el ingls rpida y eficazmente. Cuando
comiences a entender la mayora de lo que dicen en televisin, la mayor parte de lo
que dice el profesor, o de lo que leas, sin duda alguna, sentirs un regocijo contigo
mismo que te har desear querer ms, saber ms, entender ms, siendo esto muy
importante para sobrepasar una barrera personal imaginaria que se coloca al querer
hablar otro idioma y no entender a los hablantes nativos al principio.
De esta manera, cuando se quiere aprender nuevo vocabulario, indispensable
para comunicarte, se debe tener en cuenta que lo que se aprenda, no se debe olvidar,
por lo que hay que estudiar las palabras nuevas de una manera especial. No se debe
pensar que con sentarte y repasar las palabras una y otra vez por dos horas durante
un solo da se aprender todo y no se olvidar nada, porque estaran equivocados, lo
que les aconsejo es que dividan el vocabulario nuevo en situaciones o tipo de cosas y
luego repasar cierta cantidad manejable para usted diariamente durante media hora
aproximadamente. El compromiso y la clave est en que debe ser diario, todos los
das, pero por poco tiempo, de esta manera, no se aburrirn, avanzarn rpido y el
vocabulario ser aprendido significativamente.
Un retraso significante que usualmente ocurre es que algunos estudiantes

tienen pena de hablar, tanto es as, que durante una clase no practican el idioma, no
tratan de decir oraciones en ingls, este es un error gravsimo, pero muy comn.
Recuerden que al tener este libro en sus manos, han realizado un paso gigantesco e
importantsimo, el cual es dedicar un poco de tiempo a sus estudios, incrementar su
intelecto, dominar otra lengua, con esta adquisicin, viene un compromiso con
ustedes mismos, aprender el idioma, continuar repasando y practicando para mejorar
constantemente. De esta manera, puede derrotar el miedo a equivocarse frente de
otras personas, que en este caso no son extraos, sino son compaeros de clases,
profesores, entre otros. Por consecuencia, una buena tcnica de aprender el idioma es
por ensayo y error, lo que significa que sin importar cuantas veces se equivoque,
siempre seguir intentando, ya que de cada error que cometa, aprende! Ser una
situacin que no olvidar y que la falta en la gramtica ser recordada, por lo cual
ese error cometido no se repetir nuevamente, mejorado sus habilidades.
Igualmente, se recuerda que lo ms importante para dominar el idioma es la
constancia, como todo, la prctica hace al maestro, y esta no es la excepcin.
Expnganse lo ms que puedan al ingls y a su uso prctico, as alcanzarn su meta
con seguridad.
El presente libro est diseado para ensear ingls a personas de habla
espaola, resaltando en cada unidad los puntos clave que no se deben olvidar y el uso
de la gramtica en conversaciones activas a travs de dilogos y lecturas. Las partes
de cada unidad son las siguientes:
Pay attention tot his grammar: gramtica a estudiar en la unidad.
Look for the grammar in the sentences below: la gramtica en oraciones.
Dont forget: puntos claves de la unidad que siempre se deben repasar.
Lets read: la gramtica ya vista puesta en accin en conversaciones.
Vocabulary: el vocabulario de la unidad que siempre se debe repasar.
Adicionalmente, los libros poseen una unidad de repaso por cada siete de
gramtica donde se estudia con oraciones de repaso y escritura del estudiante las
unidades vistas, y una actividad especial despus de cada diez unidades donde se
ejercita distintas habilidades en el estudiante. Al final, lista de verbos y adjetivos.
Jos F. Carrera P.
Escritor y Autor de la serie de libros
para aprender ingls:
CarrerasLanguageLearning
VI
INDEX
PAGE
III
V
La Importancia del Idioma Ingls

Claves para Dominar el Idioma
FIRST LEVEL
Unit One
----------------------
Pronombres Personales, verbo To Be,

This, That, Artculos a, an y the
Unit Two
----------------------
These / Those. Plural -S

What is your name? What do you do?
UnitThree
----------------------
Verbos en 1ra, 2da y 3ra persona.

Auxiliar y verbo Do - Does.
UnitFour
----------------------
Estructuracin de Imperativos.
Preposiciones in, on, at. Verbo have
Unit Five
----------------------
Wh- questions con verbo to be

y verbos de accin.
10
Unit Six
----------------------
Formacin de Plurales. These / Those

Much, many, a lot of
12
Unit Seven
----------------------
There is / There are.Some / Any.

How much / How many
14
UnitEight
----------------------
Das, Meses, Nmeros y Horas.

Repaso gramatical: Unit 1 hasta Unit 7.
16
UnitNine
----------------------
Pronombres Personales y Pronombres

Objetivos. Preposiciones de Lugar.
Adverbios de Frecuencia.
18
Unit Ten
----------------------
Adjetivos Posesivos y Pronombres

Posesivos. Interrogacin Negativa.
21
English Tongue Twisters
23
Unit Eleven ----------------------
Posesivo Apstrofe S (s).

Verbo Belong to. Adverbios de Modo.
24
UnitTwelve
Preguntar Pertenencia con Whose.

Pronombre Personal y Objetivo.
Adjetivo y Pronombre Posesivo
26
SpecialPractice
-------------
----------------------
VII
UnitThirteen
------------------
Verbo Let. Have para ofrecer.

Auxiliares Can - Cant.
28
Unit Fourteen
-----------------
In, on, at para momentos precisos.

Suma, resta, multiplicacin y divisin
30
UnitFifteen
----------------------
How much para precios. Verbos

want to, like to y would like to.
Pronombres Indefinidos.
32
UnitSixteen
----------------------
Nmeros Ordinales y sus usos.

34
Unit Seventeen
-----------------
Pasado Simple del to be.

There was / there were.
36
Unit Eighteen
------------------
Pasado Simple de Verbos Regulares.

Auxiliares Do Does Did
38
UnitNineteen
-----------------
Preguntas Wh- en Pasado Simple

con to be y Verbos de Accin.
40
Unit Twenty
---------------------
Tag Questions. To Take idiomtico.

Verbos preposicionales.
42
Parts of Speech
44
Special Practice
----------------
Unit Twenty-one
--------------
Futuro will y be going to.

Wh- questions en Futuro.
46
Unit Twenty-two
--------------
VerbosModales
48
Preguntas especificas con How

Segundo uso de Will y May
50
Direcciones. Verbos Preposicionales.

52
---------------
Tiempo Continuo en Presente y Pasado.

Reglas para Agregar ING
54
-----------------
Tiempo Continuo con Verbos Modales.

Uso de While. Futuro cercano ING.
56
Unit Twenty-three
UnitTwenty-four
UnitTwenty-five
UnitTwenti-six
------------
--------------
VIII
UnitTwenty-seven
-------------- Comparativo de Igualdad as as

Would rather y prefer
para expresar preferencia por algo.
58
UnitTwenty-eight
--------------
Comparativos y Superlativos de
desigualdad de una y dos silabas.
Auxiliar Hadbetter
60
UnitTwenty-nine
--------------
Comparativos y Superlativos de
desigualdad de tres silabas o ms.
Excepciones good bad less
62
Also too as well either

Intensidad de must have to should
Futuro con will y shall
64
Fill in the blanks
66
Unit Thirty-one -----------------
Lectura. Prctica general

gramatical de las unidades 1 a la 30.
68
UnitThirty-two
Interacciones. Preguntas y respuestas.
70
Unit Thirty
-----------------------
Special Practice
-----------------
----------------
SECOND LEVEL
UnitOne
---------------------
Lectura, entendimiento rpido y

obtencin de idea principal.
73
UnitTwo
---------------------
Pronombres reflexivos. Oraciones con

dos sujetos y dos verbos.
75
UnitThree
---------------------
Oraciones con un verbo y dos

complementos. Posesivo of.
77
Unit Four
---------------------
Preguntas indirectas.Too Enough.

Also Too.
79
Unit Five
---------------------
Expresin impersonal con It.

Pay vs Pay for. Either Neither
81
Unit Six
---------------------
83
Unit Seven
---------------------
Cuantificadores. Could Be good at

Neither nor. Either or
Still, not anymore, ever, never, until
85
IX
Unit Eight
---------------------
Parts of the body.

87
Unit Nine
---------------------
Would para pasado. Used to get

used to be used to be supposed to.
89
Unit Ten
---------------------
Be going to para futuro y para pasado

irreal.
91
Word Puzzles
93
Unit Eleven ---------------------
Clusula de Tiempo.
Condicionales Tipo A y B.
95
Unit Twelve ---------------------
Perfect Tense. Ever never

Already yet For since
97
Unit Thirteen
-------------------
Simple Past vs Present Perfect.

Wh- questions with linking verbs.
99
Unit Fourteen
------------------
Tiempo perfecto en progresivopresente.101

How long How long ago.
SpecialPractice
-------------
Unit Fifteen -----------------------
Concordancia de tiempos verbales. 103

Restrictive and non-restrictive Clauses.
Unit Sixteen ---------------------
Transitional Words and Phrases.

105
Unit Seventeen
------------------
Reported Speech. Say - Tell
107
Unit Eighteen
-------------------
Have someone do something.

Have something done. Agreement
(I must too So must I)
109
Unit Nineteen
-------------------
Unreal Past:
would have - could have - should have
111
Condicionals Type C y D.
113
Listening Practice
115
Unit Twenty
---------------------
Special Practice
--------------
Unit Twenty-one
--------------
Condicionals Type A, B, C, D.
117
Unit Twenty-two
--------------
Verbo+gerundio / Verbo+gerundio o inf.

Conectivos even though even if
119
------------
Adjetive + ed --- Adjetive + ing

For - since - already - yet - never - ever
121
Unit Twenty-three
Unit Twenty-four
-------------
Unit Twenty-five
------------
Animals. Members of a Family.

123
Passive Voice en todos los tiempos.
125
Expressions with Get.
127
Unit Twenty-seven --------------
Different uses of the ing.
129
Unit Twenty-eight
--------------
Word Order.
Expressions for making suggestions.
131
Unit Twenty-nine
-------------
Reading. General gramatical practice 61

from unit 1 to 28.
Unit Twenti-six
Unit Thirty
--------------
---------------------
Special Practice
---------------
Interaction with classmates. Questions

and answers about the presentations.
135
Writing Activity.
137
THIRD LEVEL
Unit One
---------------------
Improving Communication Skills

Writing and speaking Activity
Unit Two
---------------------
Perfect Progressive Tense
141
Unit Three
---------------------
Future Perfect and Future Perfect

Progressive
143
Unit Four
---------------------
Simple Present; Present Progressive

Present perfect; Perfect Progressive
145
139
XI
Radio Report Practice
147
Unit Five
---------------------
Simple Past; Past Progressive

Past perfect; Perfect Progressive
148
Unit Six
---------------------
Defining and Non-defining

Relative Clauses
150
Unit Seven
---------------------
Indefinite Pronouns with else

Whether or not.
152
Unit Eight
---------------------
Vocabulary acquisition
Review of unit 1 to unit 7
154
156
Unit Nine
---------------------
Review of Conditionals Type A, B, C, D

Purpose Clauses
157
Unit Ten
---------------------
Review of Reported Speech

Using imperative.
159
Vocabulary Acquisition
161
Unit Eleven ---------------------
Review of Passive Voice

Connectives: although, in spite of,
despite of, however
163
Unit Twelve ---------------------
Expressions of Purpose
165
SpecialPractice
-------------
167
Unit Thirteen
-------------------
Asking permission
168
Unit Fourteen
------------------
Indirect Ideas. Tag Questions

Comparatives and Superlatives
170
Small Talk
172
Unit Fifteen -----------------------
XII
Unit Sixteen ---------------------
Review of unit 9 to unit 15.
174
176
Unit Seventeen
------------------
Introducing yourself to a group

of people
177
Unit Eighteen
-------------------
Disagreeing with others.
178
Unit Nineteen
-------------------
Accepting Criticisms
179
Getting along with others.
180
181
Unit Twenty
---------------------
Special Practice
--------------
183
Unit Twenty-one
--------------
Asking for help
184
Unit Twenty-two
--------------
Having a Conversation
185
Giving and Accepting Compliments
186
188
Unit Twenty-three
Unit Twenty-four
------------
-------------

Unit Twenty-five
------------
Unit Twenty-six
--------------
Unit Twenty-seven --------------
190
Following Instructions
191
Asking Permission
192
Apologizing
193
XIII
Unit Twenty-eight
Special Practice
--------------
--------------
Listening to others
194
195
197
Lista de Verbos Irregulares

Lista de Verbos Regulares
Lista de verbos Preposicionales
Lista de Adjetivos
198
200
202
208
XIV
FIRST
LEVEL
g{x yx wxxw {t x w | {x xxA

@ `t{tt Z{tw|
Carreras Language Learning.
Page 1
UNIT ONE
Pay attention to this grammar:
To be
Ser / Estar
Pronombres Personales, verbo To Be,

This, That, Artculos a, an y the
I am
I am not
Im not
-----
You are
you are not
youre not
you arent
He is
he is not
hes not
he isnt
She is
she is not
shes not
she isnt
It is
it is not
its not
it isnt
We are
we are not
were not
we arent
You are
you are not
youre not
you arent
They are
they are not
theyre not
they arent
Declaracin afirmativa / negativa singular:

This is(nt) a book = This + to be (is) + artculo (a, an) + comp.
(cerca)
That is(nt) an apple = That + to be (is) + artculo (a, an) + comp. (lejos)
This is(nt) the yellow pencil
Look for the grammar in the sentences below:

-
I am Frank. What is your name? My name is Susie.

My classmates are Angy, Eduard and Rossy. They are very intelligent.
This is my brother. He is twenty years old. How old are you? I am ________
Frank and I are friends. We are in the park. We are responsible.
That is an office. My friends are in the office. They are three people.
Are you Susie? No, I am not Susie. You arent in the kitchen.
Is this an interesting magazine? No, it isnt. It is boring.
Is she a pretty girl? Yes, she is. She is like her mother.
Is Rachel an efficient secretary? Yes, she is a very hard working girl.
Page 2
Dont Forget:
Las conjugaciones del verbo to be son am, is y are.

Para formular preguntas con verbo to be, este se coloca delante del sujeto.
La edad se dice con verbo to be. Ejemplo: he is twenty years old.
This seala lo que est cerca solo en singular.
That seala lo que est lejos solo en singular.
El artculo a se utiliza antes de una palabra con sonido de consonante.
El artculo an se utiliza antes de una palabra con sonido de vocal.
Los artculos a y an son solo para identificar un objeto singular
indefinido.
El articulo the es tanto para objetos plurales y singulares definidos.
Los adjetivos van antes del sustantivo que modifican y no tienen gnero,
plural ni singular.
Lets read:
Frank:
Susie:
Frank:
Susie:
Angy:
Frank:
Susie:
Angy:
Frank:
Susie:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Susie:
Angy:
Frank:
Susie:
Angy:
Frank:
Susie:
Good morning. How are you guys? Is this the line to catch the bus?
Hi! Yes, this is the line to catch the morning bus.
Thank you. My name is Frank. Whats your name?
Its nice to meet you Frank. My name is Susie and this is my friend Angy.
Good morning. How are you Frank? Its a pleasure!
Im fine. Thanks for asking. Is this your piece of paper?
Yes, that is my piece of paper. We are English students and that is my exam.
What is that in your hand Frank?
This is an orange. It is my breakfast for today. Whats this?
This is my English book. This is a big and interesting book.
How old are you Frank?
I am twenty-one years old and you?
I am twenty and Susie is eighteen. We are sisters.
Is that the morning bus?
No, it isnt. Thats a truck. Is that an apple on the floor?
I am sure it is.
Is that the library?
No, it isnt. That is the grocery store.
This is the bus we have to take.
Is it? I dont know.
Yes, it is. Lets go.
Vocabulary:
Apple - Classmates - Kitchen - Magazine - To be boring - Guys - To catch
To meet - Pleasure - To ask - Hand - Orange - Breakfast - Floor - Grocery store
To take - To have - To know - Lets go
Page 3
UNIT TWO
These are / arent, Those are / arent

What is your name? What do you do?
Plural -S
Declaracin afirmativa plural:

These are erasers.
These are sharpeners.
Those are rulers.
Those are markers.
These
Those + to be (are) + comp.
Preguntas:
Is this an eraser?
Are these erasers?
Is that a ruler?
Are those rulers?
Declaracin negativa plural:

These arent erasers.
These arent sharpeners.
Those arent rulers.
Those arent markers.
These
+ to be (arent) + comp.
Those
What is your name?

I am Frank.
My name is Frank.
What do you do?

I am a teacher.
I teach English.

-
What is this? This is a radio. Is it a radio? Yes, it is.

What are these? These are newspapers. Are those newspapers? Yes, they are.
What is that? That is a computer. Is it a computer? Yes, it is.
What are those? Those are sun glasses. Are they sun glasses? Yes, they are.
What is your name? I am Frank. Are you Frank? Yes, I am.
What do you do? I am a student. Are you a student? Yes, I am.
Those students are very smart people. These children are very playful.
Is your name Frank? No, it isnt. Its Eduard. Is your name Paul? No, its not.
What do you do? I am a soldier. Are you a soldier? No, I am a tennis player.
Page 4
Dont Forget:
These y those son solo para sealar lo que est en plural, por lo tanto, el
verbo to be que utilizan ser are y lo que se menciona estar en plural.
Los artculos a y an se limitan a oraciones en singular, por lo tanto NO se
colocan en oraciones plurales.
El articulo the es tanto plural como singular, este s se puede colocar en
oraciones plurales para hacer referencia a una cosa especifica.
En la oracin what do you do, el primer do mencionado hace la funcin
de auxiliar para formular la pregunta, el segundo hace la funcin de verbo.
Para negar las oraciones, se utiliza el to be en su forma negada isnt / arent.
Para realizar preguntas en donde est presente el verbo to be, el mismo se
coloca al principio de la oracin, delante del sujeto.
Lets read:
Susie:
Frank:
Susie:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Susie:
Frank:
Angy:
Susie:
Frank:
Susie:
Angy:
Frank:
Susie:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Susie:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
So, Frank, is that your name?

Yes Susie. That is my name, and I am twenty-one years old. Dont forget.
Sure. How old am I? How old is Angy?
You are twenty-four years old and Angy is eighteen.
You are almost right. Susie is twenty, not twenty-four.
Oh my god. I am sorry.
Dont worry Frank. Its ok. Are these your books?
Yes, they are. Those are math books. I study Engineering. What do you do?
Thats great. I study education. I want to teach chemistry.
She is very good at it. Angy is an excellent student.
Yes, I am sure she is! What do you do Susie?
I have my own store. I sell clothes of all kinds. I am a saleswoman.
The store is beautiful. It has different styles.
Good for you! Thats a great business. Where are you from?
We are from Toronto, Canada, but we live in Chicago, United States.
I am from San Diego, California. I am on vacation. I like Chicago.
Are you alone on your vacation?
No, Im not alone. My friends are in the hotel room. They are tired.
I understand that. This is our stop Frank.
Alright. See you later girls. Have a nice day.
Bye. Take care Frank.
You too.
Vocabulary:
Eraser - Sharpener - Ruler - Marker - To Teach - Newspapers - Sun Glasses
Smart - Children - Playful - Soldier - To forget - Right - Wrong - To own - To sell
Clothes - Store - Business To be tired - To understand - Alone - Take care
Page 5
UNIT THREE
Verbos en 1ra, 2da y 3ra persona.
Auxiliar y verbo Do - Does.
Declaracin afirmativa en Presente Simple:

I study English on weekends.
I work in my office on Mondays.
Oraciones afirmativas en 1ra

persona:
Sujeto + verbo (simple) +
comp.
You drive a car to work every day.

We do the homework on Fridays.
Oraciones afirmativas en 2da

persona:
Sujeto + verbo (simple) +
comp.
He goes to the beach every week.

She does the homework.
An airplane flies fast.
Oraciones afirmativas en 3ra

persona:
Sujeto + verbo (conjugado)
+ comp.
Conjugacin de verbos en 3ra persona:

Se le agrega al verbo -IES cuando termina en Y antecedida de consonante.
Se le agrega -ES cuando el verbo termina en: sh, ch, s, x, z, o.
Se le agrega -S a los verbos que no cumplan las condiciones anteriores
Ejemplos: study
work
studies / drive
drives / do
does
works / fly
flies / go
goes
play
plays / buy
buys
I study --- He studies
I go --- She goes
Preguntas y respuestas:
Does he go to the beach every week?
Do we do the homework on Fridays?
Yes, he does.
No, he doesnt (does not).
Yes, we do.
No, we dont (do not).
Page 6

-
Angy goes to bed early. Does Angy go to bed early? Yes, she does.
I work from Monday to Saturday.
Do you work hard every day? Yes, I work hard every day.
Does the dog bark a lot? No, it doesnt.
He does the homework. Does he do the homework? Yes, he does.
I do the homework. Do you do the homework? Yes, I do.
Does an airplane fly? Yes, it flies really fast.
Do you study on Mondays? No, I dont study on Mondays.
Does Mario work on Tuesdays? Yes, he works on Tuesdays.
Does Rossy eat snacks on Wednesdays? No, she doesnt. She is on a diet.
Does your pet eat candy on Thursdays? No, it doesnt eat candy.
Do Frank and I play soccer on Fridays? Yes, you play soccer on Fridays.
Do you travel to Margarita Island on Saturday and Sunday?
Dont Forget:
De los pronombres en ingls, la 1ra persona es I, las 2da personas son you,
we, they y las 3ra personas son he, she, it.
El do tiene funcin de auxiliar para hacer preguntas y negar y de verbo con
significado hacer.
Do es utilizado por los pronombres I, you, we, they. El does es
utilizado por he, she, it.
De la regla de conjugacin para los verbos en 3ra persona se exceptan el to
be y el to have por tener ellos mismos sus propias conjugaciones.
Para dar una declaracin negativa, se utiliza el do - does negado, es decir,
dont doesnt, esta contraccin viene de do not - does not.
Con los verbos que terminan en Y antecedida de vocal, se le agrega -S
para conjugarlo en 3ra persona porque no cumplen la condicin de la -IES.
Lets read:
Frank, Angy and Susie: Its your turn to continue the dialog. Create sentences using
the grammar that you have learned.
Vocabulary:
To study - To work - To do - To fly - To drive - To play - To go - Fast - Beach
Homework - Monday - Tuesday - Wednesday - Thursday - Friday - Saturday
Sunday - Early - To bark - Snacks - Candy - Soccer - To eat
Page 7
UNIT FOUR
Estructuracin de Imperativos.
Preposiciones in, on, at. Verbo have
Estructuracin de Imperativos:
Imperativos:
Study
Work
Eat
Do it
Go
------
Study more
Work hard
Eat it
Do it better
Go away
Se forma con el verbo en forma simple.

Algn complemento se podra colocar para
hacer la orden ms especfica, como es el
caso de more, hard, better, away en estos
ejemplos.
Preposiciones in, on, at

The wallet is in the drawer on the corner.
Susie is in the living room at the time.
The book is on the desk at the office.
Angy goes to school on the bus at seven.
Rossy is at the university in classroom one.
Frank and Angy are at the movies.
Lo que define cuando usar

estas preposiciones es el sitio
o situacin que se menciona.
No tienen regla definida.
Verbo To have:
I have a book and a pencil.
We have telephones.
He has a new car.
She has a beautiful daughter.
Sujeto + Verbo (have has) + objeto + comp.

-
Make lunch. I am hungry, and dont forget to clean after you finish.
Come here Frank. Give this to Angy when you see her.
Do you have a boat in Lake Michigan? Yes, I do. Frank has a car.
See you tomorrow at eight oclock.
Look for the keys in the pocket. Are they in there? Yes, they are.
Go to page fifteen. We are on page seven now.
Is Eduard at the football game? No, he isnt. He is at the park with Rossy.
Page 8
Dont Forget:
La formacin de imperativos se logra al colocar el verbo de accin en forma

simple sin la presencia de un sujeto, el you se sobreentiende que est
presente en la oracin sin necesidad de escribirlo.
De escribir el sujeto al momento de querer formar un imperativo, este no sera
tal, se convertira en una oracin en la que el sujeto realiza su accin porque
lo desea y no porque otro se lo ordena.
Las preposiciones in, on, at para lugares se colocan de acuerdo al sitio
mencionado. Se recomienda lecturas varias para verificar la preposicin que
requiere diferentes lugares.
Como un significado literal, se puede decir que in es dentro y se utiliza
para mencionar meses o aos; on es sobre y se utiliza para decir los das
de la semana y at para decir la hora.
El verbo have se utiliza para expresar lo que se tiene. La conjugacin de
este verbo en 3ra persona es has. El verbo mencionado no es utilizado para
decir la edad, en estos casos, se utiliza verbo to be (Unit One).
Lets read:
Frank:
Rossy:
Frank:
Rossy:
Frank:
Rossy:
Frank:
Rossy:
Frank:
Rossy:
Frank:
Rossy:
Frank:
Rossy:
Frank:
Rossy:
Frank:
Rossy:
Finally, I am back to the hotel room. I am tired. How are you guys?
I am fine. I watch TV. What do you eat?
I eat my dinner. I eat a sandwich. What do you eat?
I eat a peach, grapes and an orange. I am a healthy person.
Yes, you are. Are you on a diet?
Actually, I am. Where is Eduard?
He is in the back yard. He smokes a cigarette everyday at seven thirty.
You are right. Do you smoke?
No, I dont and you?
I dont. Where do you work?
I dont work. I study engineering at Californias University. Do you work?
Yes, I work in town. Does Eduard work or study?
I think both. He studies Languages and works as a teacher.
Thats great. Good for him. Do you have a laptop here?
Sorry, I dont. Go downstairs and borrow one.
Thats a good idea. Lets go and find Eduard.
Wait a minute, please. Brush your teeth first.
Sure. Lets go now.
Vocabulary:
Wallet - Drawer - Corner - Daughter - Desk To be hungry - To clean - To finish
To see - To watch - Dinner - Peach - Grapes - Healthy - Back yard - To smoke
To study Both Downstairs To borrow To Find To Brush
Page 9
UNIT FIVE
Wh- questions
Wh- questions con verbo to be y

verbos de accin.
Who
------------- Quin?
What
-------------
Qu?
Where -------------
Dnde?
How
-------------
Cmo?
Why
-------------
Porqu?
When
------------- Cundo?
Which
------------- Cul?
Wh- questions con verbo to be

Who is that girl in the classroom?
What is your name?
Where are you right now?
How is she today?
Why am I at the football game?
When is she at her house?
Which office are you in?
Wh- + to be + sujeto + comp.
Wh- questions con verbos de Accin

Who goes to the beach on Monday?
What does he study at the university?
Where do you play tennis?
How does she go to work every day?
Why do they smoke and drink?
When does the airplane depart?
Which airline do you take?
Who do you go to the party with?
Wh- + do / does + sujeto + verbo + comp.
Who + verbo (3ra persona) + comp.

-
He works at his office on Mondays. When does he work at his office?

I practice sports to be in shape. Why do you practice sports?
I drive carefully on Easter. How do you drive on Easter?
The seasons are spring, summer, fall and winter. Which season do you like?
Is she your friend? What is her name?
I study English in San Diego. What do you study? Where do you study?
He is at the restaurant. He eats dinner. Where is he? What does he do?
Page 10
Dont Forget:
Si una oracin posee verbo to be, se utiliza el mismo verbo to be como

auxiliar para formular la pregunta, cambiando la conjugacin a la adecuada de
acuerdo con el pronombre que se menciona.
El auxiliar do / does se utiliza en oraciones que sean en presente simple sin
la presencia del to be como verbo principal. El do es para 1ra y 2da
persona y el does es para 3ra persona.
La estructura de una pregunta siempre ser: auxiliar + sujeto + verbo + comp,
en la Wh- questions no vara esta frmula, solo se le agrega el Wh- delante del
auxiliar.
Al formular Wh- questions, se debe estar pendiente que no se responda a la
pregunta en la misma oracin, es decir, si se pregunta con when, no se debe
decir periodo de tiempo en el complemento, si se pregunta con why, no se
debe decir el porqu o el para qu se hizo la accin y as sucesivamente.
El who que pregunta por el sujeto del complemento (who complemento) va
seguido del auxiliar do / does para formular la pregunta. El who que
pregunta por el sujeto principal va seguido del verbo conjugado en 3ra
persona.
Lets read:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Frank:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Frank:
Rossy:
Hi Eduard. Do you enjoy smoking your cigar?

Yes, I do. I think about coming back to California. I dont want to leave.
I agree with you but we live there. When do you begin to work?
I begin to work in three days from now. I dont like the idea. I want to stay.
Why do you want to stay? Where is your family? Where are your friends?
They are in California but it doesnt matter. I can make new friends here.
Listen to you. I know this is a good place but this isnt where you belong.
Yes, you are right. I miss my family and friends. I am happy to go home.
What is your favorite place in Chicago?
I like downtown a lot. That is my favorite place.
Why do you like it?
Because you find everything and everybody here. Its amazing.
Who goes downtown with you?
Frank does. Hey, where do we go today?
I want to visit Michigan Lake. Do you agree? Would you like to go there?
That sounds like a great idea. Lets do it. How do we get there?
We take the train and then we walk. What do you play there?
People usually play volleyball. Who do we play it with?
We can ask somebody there and then play for a while.
Vocabulary:
Carefully - To practice To be in shape - Easter - Spring - Summer - Fall - Winter
To come - To want - To stay - To know - Amazing - To walk
Page 11
UNIT SIX
Formacin de Plurales. These / Those

Much, many, a lot of
Declaraciones afirmativas y negativas en plural

I have many pieces of paper on my desk.
She has a lot of books in her shelf.
The boys are in the kitchen.
Boxes are usually brown.
You cook many things with potatoes.
These watches are very expensive.
Armies are well trained.
Knives are sharp.
Those thieves are dangerous.
He drinks much water.
Oraciones en plural
Formacin de Plurales

Se le agrega -VES al sustantivo cuando este termina en: f, fe.

Agregue al sustantivo -IES cuando termina en Y antecedida de consonante.
Se le agrega -ES cuando el sustantivo termina en: sh, ch, s, x, z, o.
Se le agrega -S al sustantivo que no cumpla las condiciones anteriores.
Existen sustantivos irregulares, es decir, que no aceptan esta regla.
Plurales Irregulares
man - men
woman - women
child - children
foot - feet
tooth - teeth
sheep - sheep
mouse - mice
goose - geese
person - people
deer - deer
fish - fish

-
The books are on the bed and the apples on the desk.
You use tomatoes to make a salad.
We breathe much oxygen and we drink much juice.
He makes many cups of coffee. She drinks much coffee.
She brings a lot of happiness to the house.
He swims a lot of miles per week. I swim just one mile per month.
Page 12
Dont Forget:
Aprender las reglas para la formacin de plural y tenerlas siempre en cuenta.
En esta unidad, las reglas dadas le son aplicadas a sustantivos singulares en
ingls que los convierte en sustantivos plurales. Si se aplica la regla de IES,
-ES S a un verbo, el mismo cambiaria a 3ra persona.
Al momento de agregar IES VES, la letra Y y la F con la cual
termina las palabras respectivamente desaparecen para agregarle lo ya
mencionado y colocarlas en plural.
Los plurales irregulares no aceptan las reglas explicadas, sino que su plural es
una palabra distinta.
Al tener oraciones en plural, el verbo to be que se utiliza es el are.
These y those son los plurales de this y that respectivamente.
Many es para decir mucho de algo contable. Much es para decir mucho
de algo incontable. A lot of es para decir mucho de algo tanto contable
como incontable .
Lets read:
Susie:
Rossy:
Susie:
Rossy:
Susie:
Rossy:
Susie:
Rossy:
Susie:
Rossy:
Susie:
Rossy:
Susie:
Rossy:
Susie:
Welcome to my house Rossy. This is the kitchen, the living room and the
back yard. We have three bedrooms and three bathrooms.
It is very pretty. What do you have here?
We have a bit of everything. We have a car, many chairs, four tables, two
ovens, one sink, two can openers, ten pair of shoes, many tomatoes, five
watches, two dictionaries, three wolves, many knives, twelve boxes and so
on. We have much love and respect for each other. We drink much water
and we eat a lot of healthy food. We have much sand in the back yard.
Nice Susie. Do you have flies or mice?
We dont have those but we have two children.
Are those books?
Yes, those are my English books.
Are these leaves?
Yes, they are. Angy, come and sweep the floor.
Do you drink a lot of beer? Does Angy drink much coffee?
We dont drink much. We prefer fruit juice. Do you drink many cups of
coffee?
I prefer to drink wine on weekends. Men get hangovers and they are funny.
I agree with you. When do I see you again?
In a couple of days. Your house is very pretty.
Thanks. Come and see my room.
Vocabulary:
Desk - Shelf - Expensive - Things - Army - Knife - Sharp - Thief - To drink
Salad - To breathe - To bring - To swim - Week - Oven - Sink - Wolf
Sand - To fly - Fly - Child - To sweep - Hangover
Page 13
UNIT SEVEN
There is / There are.

Some / Any.
How much / How many
Declaraciones afirmativas y negativas

There is a salesman at the door.
There is an orange on the street.
There are four forks on the table.
There are people in the building.
There is + artculo (a, an) + cosa+ comp.

There are + cosas + comp.
Is there an orange on the street?

Are there people in the building?
Do you have any money?
Yes, I have some money.
No, I dont have any money.
Preguntas
Any: preguntas y respuestas negativas

Some: respuestas positivas
How many books are there on the table?

How many cups of coffee do you want?
How much sugar would you like?
How much sand is there in the beach?
How many: contable.

How much: incontable.

-
What is there in your room? There is a bed. There are some shoes.
Are there any pictures in your office? Yes, there are five pictures in my office.
How many classes do you have a day? I have three classes a day.
How much milk does he pour in his glass?
Does she owe you any money? No, she doesnt but you do.
How many telephones do you own? I own two telephones.
Is there a cat here? No, there isnt. There are many dogs.
Does she want any water? No, she doesnt want any water.
Are there any spiders in your house? Yes, there are some spiders.
How much money is there in your pocket?
How many dollars are there in your pocket?
Page 14
Dont Forget:
There is es siempre para singular y there are es siempre para plural.

Cuando se utiliza there is se tiene que colocar un artculo (a, an) y la cosa
que se menciona debe estar en singular.
Cuando se utiliza there are no se tiene que colocar un artculo y la cosa que
se menciona debe estar en plural.
Any se utiliza para preguntar y para decir ninguno en respuestas negativas
Some se utiliza para decir algunos en respuestas positivas.
How much es para preguntar cunto de cosas incontables y how many
para preguntar cunto de cosas contables.
Lets read:
Susie:
Rossy:
Susie:
Rossy:
Susie:
Rossy:
Susie:
Rossy:
Susie:
Rossy:
Susie:
Rossy:
Susie:
Rossy:
Susie:
Rossy:
Susie:
Angy:
Rossy:
Susie:
Angy:
This is my room Rossy. Do you like it?

Yes, its very cosy. Is there a T.V. here?
Of course there is. There is a T.V. and there is a bed. I have many clothes
and a lot of shoes.
I can see that. The clothes are everywhere in the room.
I am sorry. My room is always in a mess.
Dont worry. I am just kidding. My room is like this. Its always in a mess.
Whats there in your room?
There are many things in my room. There is a desk. There is a computer.
There is a fan. There is food. There are books in the shelf. There are
pictures of my friends. There are toys.
Is there a carpet? Are there windows?
There isnt a carpet but I have two windows. Much light comes in.
Thats nice. There is only one window in my room. How much cereal do
you eat for breakfast? Do you drink orange juice?
I eat one bowl of cereal and I drink two glasses of orange juice. How much
cereal does Angy eat?
She eats three bowls of cereal. She eats a lot and drinks much juice.
Is there something good to watch on T.V.?
No, there isnt. Today is Monday so they broadcast many soap operas.
You are right but I dont like soap operas and you?
There is one that I like. Are you there Angy?
Yes, I am in the kitchen. I am hungry. Is Rossy hungry?
Yes, but not too much. I would like a cracker.
Bring two crackers Angy, please! I am a bit hungry too.
Sure, but dont take me as your waitress.
Vocabulary:
Salesman - Street - Building - To want - Sand - Spiders - Pocket - To see
To be kidding - To be hungry - To be in a mess - Things - Toys - Carpet - Light
To light - To watch - To broadcast Waitress Cracker - Cookie
Page 15
UNIT EIGHT
Das, Meses, Nmeros y Horas.
Das de la Semana
Days of the Week
Nmeros
Numbers
Hora
Time
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
One
Two
Three
Four
Five
Six
Seven
Eight
Nine
Ten
Meses del Ao
Months of the year
Eleven
Twelve
Thirteen
Fourteen
Fifteen
Sixteen
Seventeen
Eighteen
Nineteen
Twenty
Twenty - one
Twenty - two
Thirty
Thirty - one
Thirty - two
Forty
Forty - one
Forty - two
Fifty
Fifty - one
January
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
Sixty
Seventy
Eighty
Ninety
One hundred
Two hundred
One thousand
Two thousand
One million
Two million
3:15
- It is three fifteen
- It is fifteen after three
- It is a quarter past three
6:30
- It is six and a half
- It is half past six
- It is half to seven
3:50
- Its three fifty
- Its ten to four
12am
Its midnight
12pm
Its noon
What time is it?

-- What is the time please?

Page 16
Always Remember:

I am Frank. I am a student. I am twenty one years old. I am tall and intelligent.

He is my friend. He is Eduard. He is twenty five years old. He is in the park.
They are workers. They are young people. They are in a party. They are tall.
Whats this? This is a necklace and that is an earring.
Who are those? Those are the members of my family and these are my sisters.
I play tennis. My sister goes to the beach. Frank studies at the university.
Does your sister play volley? Does Frank study at the university?
I have two radios and my nephew has three.
What do you play? When do you work? How do you cook? Where do I go?
These are dictionaries. Those are beautiful ladies. I have many knives.
She sends many kisses. He eats many candies.
There is a dog on the street. Is there an armchair in the living room?
There are many people in the city today. Are there couches in your office?
How many stars are there in the universe? How much coffee do you want?
Lets Practice:
Write a short story using the grammar you have learned.
Page 17
UNIT NINE
Pronombres Personales
Sustituye al sujeto
principal
de
la
oracin. Cuando se
conozca de quien se
habla, se le puede
llamar
por
su
pronombre personal.
I
You
He
She
It
We
You
They
Pronombres Personales y Pronombres

Objetivos. Preposiciones de Lugar.
Adverbios de Frecuencia.
Pronombres Objetivos
Sustituye al sujeto
que est despus de
un verbo o una
preposicin. Cuando
se conozca de quien
se habla, se le puede
llamar
por
su
pronombre objetivo.
Preposiciones
de Lugar
by
inside
above
below
beside
under
up
down
Adverbios de
Frecuencia
once a day / week ...

twice a day / week ...
three times a day / week ...
daily / weekly / monthly
every day / every week
on Mondays / on weekends
always
almost always
usually / regularly
through
near
outside of
between
straight
beyond
in front of
in back of
Me
You
Him
Her
It
Us
You
Them
next to
on top of
beneath
among
around
against
opposite
behind
often / frequently
sometimes
hardly ever
seldom / rarely
never
constantly
continuously
again and again
every now and then
Page 18

-
He is by the river with her.

The pen is beside the eraser.
Walk through the door.
The computer is in front of the window.
The picture is above the sofa.
There is a lair among us.
He usually goes to the gym at lunchtime.
She sometimes sees him down the street
I always brush my teeth. I brush them before I go to bed.
They usually have toasts for breakfast.
We hardly ever travel abroad.
I occasionally visit the capital. My friend visits it on weekends.
You rarely smoke cigars. You smoke them when you are busy.
He often goes to the park with my dog.
She seldom has a chance to go to the theatre.
They never work on weekends.
She goes to school every day.
I take my breakfast at my office twice a week.
He takes a shower daily.
He gets paid monthly.
I play soccer every now and then.
Dont Forget:
Para utilizar un pronombre, se debe haber identificado la persona o cosa de lo

que se est hablando para que el mismo haga referencia a quien se mencion.
Un pronombre siempre hace referencia a quien a lo que se mencion de
ltimo en la conversacin.
Los Pronombres Personales sustituyen el nombre del sujeto principal, el que
est al principio de la oracin.
Los Pronombres Objetivos reemplazan el nombre del sujeto que est despus
de un verbo o una preposicin.
Una preposicin une sustantivos, pronombres y frases a otras palabras en una
oracin.
Always, usually, regularly, normally, often, sometimes, occasionally, rarely,
seldom, never son Adverbios de Frecuencia cuya posicin en la oracin ser
antes del verbo de accin o despus del verbo to be.
Adverbios de Frecuencia tales como once a day, twice a day, weekly,
everyday, every month, on Mondays, etc van ubicados al final de la oracin.
Page 19
Lets read:
Frank: Whats up Eduard? Are you with Rossy?
Eduard: Hey Frank. I am fine and you? Yes, I am with her. Why do you ask?
Frank: Just to know. I want to introduce you one of my friends. She is Angy and
she is on the phone.
Eduard: Sure man!
Frank: Angy, are you there? I introduce you to Eduard.
Angy: Hello Eduard. How are you?
Eduard: Hi Angy, I am good. Are you with Susie?
Angy: Yes, I am with her. She is outside of the house, around the pool.
Eduard: Where are you?
Angy: I am inside my house, near the kitchen, in front of the computer.
Eduard: Are you with your friends?
Angy: No, I am not with them. They are with Susie.
Eduard: Are they with her along the pool?
Angy: Yes, they are opposite from the back yard window. Where are you?
Eduard: I am against the wall, behind the sofa and Frank is beside the microwave,
below the lamp from the roof.
Angy: Good description. I know where you are!
Eduard: Thank you, how often do you swim in the pool?
Angy: I swim every morning to make exercise. I like to be in shape.
Eduard: How often does Susie swim?
Angy: She sometimes swims at night. She always works so she seldom has a
chance to do it. She cleans the pool every now and then.
Eduard: Do you clean it?
Angy: I clean it every day, again and again. I never let it get dirty.
Eduard: I hardly ever clean. My room is always in a mess. People constantly tell me
to organize it but I rarely do it.
Angy: Is Frank around? I want to talk to him.
Frank: I am here Angy. Tell me?
Angy: I have to go Frank. Bye.
Frank: Bye Angy. Enjoy your time over the pool.
Vocabulary:
Lunchtime -To brush -To travel -Abroad -To smoke - To be busy - Theater
Take a shower - To Get paid - To ask - To introduce - Pool - Microwave - Roof
To swim - To clean - To tell - To organize - To enjoy
Page 20
UNIT TEN
Adjetivos Posesivos
Identifica a quien le
pertenece el sustantivo.
Debido a que es un
adjetivo, este siempre
tiene que ir seguido de
un
sustantivo
que
modifica.
My
Your
His
Her
Its
Our
Your
Their
Interrogacin Afirmativa
Adjetivos Posesivos y Pronombres

Posesivos. Interrogacin Negativa.
Pronombres Posesivos
Sustituye el sustantivo
del cual se habla y se
sobreentiende a quien le
pertenece la cosa por
ser pronombre.
Mine
Yours
His
Hers
Its
Ours
Yours
Theirs
Interrogacin Negativa
- Do you like coffee?

Yes, I like coffee.
No, I dont like coffee.
- Dont you like coffee?

Yes, I do like coffee!
No, I dont like coffee.
- Is she an interpreter?
Yes, she is an interpreter.
No, she isnt an interpreter.
- Arent I a swimmer?
Yes, you are a swimmer.
No, you arent a swimmer.
- Am I crazy?
Yes, you are crazy.
No, you are not crazy.
- Does he not go to school today?

Yes, he does go to school today.
No, he doesnt go to school today.

-
This is a blue pencil. It is my pencil. Its mine. Hers is red and yours is brown.
My car is fast. Your car is slow. Theirs is green and old. Mine is golden.
Isnt this my paper? No, its ours. Yours is on the table.
Dont you smoke her cigarettes? No, I dont. I have mine. Hers are strong.
Does she not drink alcohol? Yes, she does drink alcohol. She drinks whiskey.
Page 21
Dont Forget:
La funcin de un adjetivo es calificar a un sustantivo. En ingls, a diferencia
del espaol, los adjetivos se colocan antes del sustantivo y los mismos no
tienen genero, singular o plural, ni tercera persona. Un adjetivo ms un
sustantivo puede hacer la funcin de sujeto en una oracin.
La funcin de un pronombre es sustituir el sustantivo del cual se est
hablando, siempre y cuando este ya sea conocido. Un pronombre es un sujeto
en una oracin.
Aplicando los dos puntos mencionados anteriormente, tenemos que un
Adjetivo Posesivo ser utilizado en el caso que se mencione la cosa que
califica y que el Pronombre Posesivo ser utilizado para reemplazar el nombre
de la cosa que se posee y decir a quien le pertenece al mismo tiempo.
Para formular una Interrogacin Negativa se debe colocar el auxiliar de la
oracin en su forma negada. De estar contrado, va al principio de la oracin,
de no estar contrado, el auxiliar rodear al sujeto junto a la negacin (not).
Si se tiene como sujeto I, el to be que le corresponde al formular la
Interrogacin Negativa contrada ser are negado (arent).
Lets read:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Hey Angy, arent these your purple shoes?

Yes, they are my purple shoes. Isnt this your yellow blouse?
No, it isnt my blouse. Where is Frank? Is that his hat on the couch?
Yes, I think it is his. His cap is red and orange, like that one.
Do you know Eduard and Rossy?
Yes, I know them. Why do you ask?
Arent these their keys?
Their keys are white, black and gray. Are those the colors of the keys?
Yes, those are. They are theirs then.
Yes, I guess theyre theirs. Is this your pink skirt?
Yes, it is my pink skirt. Are those your blue pants?
Are they light blue or dark blue?
They are dark blue. Are they yours?
No, they arent mine. My pants are light blue.
Arent I fat?
No, you arent fat Susie. Does Rossy not dress well?
Yes, she does dress well. I like all her clothes.
Ours is beautiful. Lets have a costume party!
Vocabulary:
Interpreter - Crazy - Swimmer - Blouse - Keys - To guess - Skirt - Fat
To dress - Costume - Purple - Blue - Green - Yellow - Orange - Red - Black
White - Gray - Brown - Pink - Light blue - Dark Blue
Page 22
SPECIAL PRACTICE
English Tongue Twisters

A big black bug bit a big black bear,
it made the big black bear bleed blood
She sells sea shells by the sea shore.

The shells she sells are surely seashells.
So if she sells shells on the seashore,
I'm sure she sells seashore shells.
A flea and a fly flew up in a flue.

Said the flea, "Let us fly!"
Said the fly, "Let us flee!"
So they flew through a flaw in the flue.
How much wood would a woodchuck chuck

if a woodchuck could chuck wood?
He would chuck, he would, as much as he could,
and chuck as much wood as a woodchuck would
if a woodchuck could chuck wood.
Three gray geese in the green grass grazing.

Gray were the geese and green was the grass.
While we were walking, we were watching window washers

wash Washington's windows with warm washing water.
Grandma gathers great green grapes.

Page 23
UNIT ELEVEN
Posesivo Apstrofe S (s). Verbo

Belong to. Adverbios de Modo.
Posesivo Apostrofe S (s)

These are Franks paper clips.
Isnt that Carloss folder?
That is the students printer.
These are her friends notepads.
The mens stapler is on the desk.
Pick up the childrens toys.
Susie and Angys car is fast.
La cosa le pertenece al sujeto que

posee el apostrofe S (s).
Nombre + s + cosa
Verbo Belong to
The fax machine belongs to Frank.
These bags belong to Angy.
The email address belongs to Susie.
Do the batteries belong to him?
His heart belongs to her.
Adverbios de Modo
La cosa le pertenece al sujeto que esta

despus del belong to.
Cosa + belong to + sujeto (Pro. Obj.)
Sudden
- Suddenly
Happy
- Happily
Possible - Possibly
Basic
- Basically
Good
- Well

-
This is Susies job. She sells clothes easily and quickly.

Franks bookcase is full of dirt. He really needs to clean it.
Does the wastebasket belong to Susie? Yes, it belongs to her.
This is the babies lamp. It belongs to them. It is their lamp. Its theirs.
She works hard every day and he basically does nothing.
Page 24
Dont Forget:
Sujeto singular que termine en cualquier letra, incluso S, se le agrega

apstrofe S (s) para el posesivo.
Sujeto plural que si termine en S, se le agrega solo apstrofe () para el
posesivo.
Sujeto plural que no termine en S, se le agrega apstrofe S (s) para el
posesivo.
Belong to es un verbo, por lo tanto se le aplican las reglas de un verbo. Se
tiene que conjugar en tercera persona, necesita un auxiliar para formular
preguntas y el verbo queda en forma simple con la presencia del mismo.
Los Adverbios de modo sealan cmo se realiza la accin indicada por el
verbo y se forman partiendo del adjetivo y agregndole ly. Si el adjetivo
termina con "y", se cambia por "ily". Si termina en "ble", se cambia por "bly".
Si termina en "ic", se agrega "ally".
Los Adverbios de Modo Fast y hard no se modifican.
El equivalente de los Adverbios de Modo en espaol son las palabras que
terminan en mente. Ej. Rpidamente.
Lets read:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Do you want to have a costume party? Thats a great idea!

Thanks. Lets talk about it later. Are these Franks hiking boots?
Yes, they are. Why are they here? And this is his umbrella.
Those are his hiking boots. They belong to him. They are his.
This is Rossys sweater. It belongs to her. Its her sweater. Its hers.
Do you have my bathing suit? I cannot find it.
No, I dont. That is yours. I have mine and Rossys.
What about my sunglasses? Do you have them?
Yes, I do. I have both, yours and mine. Do you have my Friends camera?
Its on the table. Look for it and take me a picture quickly.
Done! In my opinion, you look extremely ugly. Its not your best angle.
It looks unbelievably bad. I am surely beautiful but not here.
How often do you take your pictures?
I take my pictures daily but when I am on vacations, once a week.
This is Rossy and Eduards money. Give it back to them.
How often do you see them?
I see them once in a while. I cook slowly when I am with them.
Thats because you talk too much, anyhow, your food is tasteful.
Thanks. You cook well too. See, now I am hungry.
Vocabulary:
Stapler - Printer - To belong - Bag - Suddenly - Quickly - To need - To clean
Wastebasket - Party - Later - To hike - Umbrella - Done - Ugly - To take pictures
To give - To cook - To talk - Anyhow
Page 25
UNIT TWELVE
Preguntar Pertenencia con Whose.

Pronombre Personal y Objetivo.
Adjetivo y Pronombre Posesivo
Whose = De quien?
Whose chocolate is this in the kitchen?
Whose ice cream do you eat in the hallway?
Whose butter do you use in the restaurant?
Whose nuts are those in the lobby?
Whose fruit do you use to make the juice?
Whose cookies and crackers are those?
Whose + to be + cosa(s)?
Whose + cosa + aux. + Suj. + verb + comp.
PRONOMBRE
PERSONAL
PRONOMBRE
OBJETIVO
ADJETIVO
POSESIVO
PRONOMBRE
POSESIVO
I
YOU
HE
SHE
IT
WE
YOU
THEY
ME
YOU
HIM
HER
IT
US
YOU
THEM
MY
YOUR
HIS
HER
ITS
OUR
YOUR
THEIR
MINE
YOURS
HIS
HERS
ITS
OURS
YOURS
THEIRS

-
Whose stuffed animal is that on the bed? Thats Angys. It is hers.

This clock belongs to Eduard. Whose is it? Its his.
These plates are Franks. Whose are those? They belong to Frank.
Whose dolls are those on the wall? They are Rossys. She collects them.
Whose postcard is this? It is from my sister. She is away on vacation.
She sees her boyfriend very often. He leaves her with his parents to go out.
The restaurant is amazing. Its food is great and its service too.
Is that a poster of a famous person? Whose is it? Its the neighbors poster.
He gives her a kiss in the cheek when he sees her.
My computer is bad. Yours is good but hers is better.
Page 26
Dont Forget:
Whose se utiliza para preguntar a quien le pertenece alguna cosa.

Mayormente se utiliza como adjetivo, por lo tanto la cosa que se menciona
debe ir despus del mismo. Para que sea utilizado como pronombre, se debe
conocer la cosa de la que se habla y es ms comn en el ingls hablado.
El Pronombre Personal reemplaza el nombre del sujeto principal de la
oracin, mientras que el Pronombre Objetivo reemplaza al sujeto que est
despus de un verbo o una preposicin.
El Adjetivo Posesivo debe estar seguido del sustantivo al que califica.
Dentro del Pronombre Posesivo est incluido la cosa de la que se habla y a
quien le pertenece. Por ser pronombre, no puede ir seguido de un sustantivo.
Lets read:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
My family is here to spend the weekend. Im very happy.

Thats great. Enjoy your time in family. Is this your soccer ball?
No, it isnt. It is my uncles ball. He plays soccer very well.
Whose tennis racquet is that on the floor?
That belongs to my aunt. She plays tennis and she also has some tennis balls.
Do you usually play with her?
No, I dont. She usually plays with her friends. Do you know them?
I dont think I know them. Is this your aspirin?
Thats my grandparents. My grandmother is sick and my grandfather too.
Do you have a son or a daughter?
I dont have any children so far. Do you?
I dont either. Whose picture is this?
Its mine. They are my cousins.
My friends wife has a frame just like this one and my nieces husband too.
It is a really common frame. My nephew has a similar one.
Does your family like winter? It is really cold.
No, they dont like it. They prefer spring but I like summer, and you?
I prefer fall. Its not very hot and not very cold.
Its windy and snowy right now. I dont like it. I like when its sunny and warm.
What do you wear in the winter season?
I wear a hat, a scarf, a sweater, gloves and two pairs of socks.
When its rainy, I wear a raincoat and boots and I use an umbrella.
It is very cold. Its 32 degrees Fahrenheit. It equals 0 degrees Celsius.
This is why I prefer fall. During this season, it doesnt get this cold.
Vocabulary:
Ice cream - Butter - Nuts - Doll To collect - To leave - Parents - Amazing
Neighbor - To kiss - To spend - To play - Family members - To think
To prefer - Winter - Spring - Summer - Fall - Season
Page 27
UNIT THIRTEEN
Verbo Let. Have para ofrecer.

Auxiliares Can - Cant.
Verbo Let
He lets her daughter go to parties.
Let me smoke a cigarette.
Let them call her.
I dont let you do it.
Let us dance all night.
Lets paint the wall.
Suj + let + suj. (Pron. Obj) + verb + comp
Have para Ofrecer

Have a seat.
Have a glass of water.
Have a cup of coffee.
Have a soda.
Have a bite.
Have a smoke.
Have some juice.
Have a look.
Se ofrece lo que se menciona

despus del have
Auxiliar Can Cant

I can make you learn English.
He can sing very well.
He cannot (cant) bet money.
We cant burn that building.
Can they come today?
It cant fly.
Suj. + can cant + Verbo (simple) + comp.

-
Can you let me have the car today? No, I cant. Lets use it tomorrow.
Let me have fun, please! Go outside and have some fresh air.
He cant fly. He is not a butterfly. Dont let him jump.
I can make the math problem but I cant solve it.
Can you read this brochure? No, I cant read that pamphlet.
Cant he find his way home? I dont know. Lets help him.
Can you keep it a secret? Yes, let me show you. Tell me!
Page 28
Dont Forget:
Let se utiliza para pedir permiso y para indicar una accin que se realizar
por un grupo, para esta ltima funcin, el verbo ser utilizado de esta forma:
lets, lo que es la contraccin de let us.
La funcin del have para ofrecer se logra al colocarlo con estructura de
imperativo, es decir, con el verbo en forma simple y sin la presencia del
sujeto. Se puede ofrecer cualquier cosa de esta forma.
El auxiliar can significa poder hacer algo. Por ser auxiliar, es el mismo para
todos los pronombres y los verbos quedan en forma simple. La negacin es
cannot, con contraccin sera cant.
Lets read:
Eduard: What does your family do?
Rossy:
They all do different things. There is an architect, a businessman, an artist,
a teacher, a doctor, a waiter, a cashier and so on in our family.
Eduard: Dont you have a flight attendance or a designer?
Rossy:
We do have a stewardess but we dont have a designer. What about your
family? What do they do?
Eduard: My sister is a singer and one of my cousins is a baseball player.
Rossy:
Is your family American?
Eduard: Not all of them. I have roots from everywhere in the world. My mother is
Australian and my father is Brazilian. My sister is French and my brother is
Canadian. Some of my uncles are German and some of my aunts are
Spanish. What about yours?
Rossy:
My parents are from Italy. They are Italian. My uncles and aunts are
Venezuelan and some of my cousins are Chinese. They are from China.
Eduard: Do you know England?
Rossy:
No, I dont. Do you know Korea or Japan?
Eduard: Yes, I do. Do you know Argentina or Mexico?
Rossy:
Yes, I do. These are my pictures. Have a look!
Eduard: Let me see. They are beautiful. Can I take one with me?
Rossy:
You can surely take one with you. Let me see yours.
Eduard: I dont have them here. Have a drink please.
Rossy:
Thank you. I am thirsty. Can you type my letter?
Eduard: I can but I dont want to. I am tired. Can you drive me home?
Rossy:
Yes, I can. Cant you write my letter at your house?
Eduard: I cant because I dont have a computer.
Rossy:
You need to buy one. Lets do it!
Eduard: Yes, I know. Can you buy it for me but you pay.
Vocabulary:
To call - To dance - To bite - To paint - To look - To sing - To bet - To burn
To come - To go - To fly - To jump - To tell - Steward - To be thirsty - To type
Page 29
UNIT FOURTEEN
In, on, at para momentos precisos.

Suma, resta, multiplicacin y divisin
Momentos Precisos
On Mondays, on Tuesdays, on Friday
In January, in February, in March
In 2006, in 2007, in 2008
At three oclock, at one fifteen
In the morning, in the afternoon, at night.
Eventos exactos en el
tiempo
SUMA
RESTA
7 + 3 = 10
- Seven plus three
equals ten.
54=1
- Five minus four
equals one.
4 x 2=8
- Four times two
equals eight.
How much is
seven and three?
How much is five

minus four?
How much is four

times two?
- Seven and three

is ten.
- Five minus four

is one.
- Four times two is

eight.
MULTIPLICACIN
DIVISIN
12 / 4 = 3
- Twelve divided by
four equals three.
How much is
twelve divided by
four?
Twelve divided by
four is three.

-
My boss always arrives late in the morning on Mondays.

The students usually come to the park in the afternoons at four oclock.
The secretary has her vacations in august.
I never work on Sundays but my colleague does.
I begin to work at nine oclock and I get off work at four oclock.
Frank usually sees her girlfriend at night on weekends.
I go to school at seven oclock on Mondays.
Ten times ten is one hundred and ten divided by ten is one.
How much is ten minus ten? It is zero.
I never study math on a Friday night.
My father usually gets up late in the morning.
Three hundred plus one thousand equals one thousand and three hundred.
Eduard always goes to Chicago in winter. He likes snow.
Page 30
Dont Forget:
Siempre se utiliza on con los das de la semana. Siempre se utiliza in con

los meses y los aos. Siempre se utiliza at con las horas. Siempre ser in
the morning, in the afternoon, in the evening y at night.
Se pueden juntar varias preposiciones en una oracin para dar un momento
exacto en el tiempo.
Para sumar siempre ser plus. Para restar siempre ser minus. Para
multiplicar siempre ser times. Para dividir siempre ser divided by.
Lets read:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Does your family celebrate the holidays?

Of course they do. We celebrate everything! Do you?
We do but not too often. What do you celebrate?
We like Thanksgiving Day on the fourth Thursday of November.
My family gathers on New Years Day. We love it.
I personally like Carnival in February. I dance a lot and I see the parade.
My sister likes San Valentines Day on February 14th.
I like it too. I get very romantic. My mother likes Easter. She is religious.
My mother likes it too. She prays a lot on Good Friday.
Do you watch T.V. on weekends?
Yes, I do it when I finish lunch. Do you relax on weekends?
No, I dont because I cant decide what to wear and I reply all my e-mails.
Does Susie close her store at three oclock on Saturdays?
No, she doesnt. She closes it at four oclock.
I have a math exam tomorrow. It is difficult. Can you help me?
Yes, I can. How can I help you?
How much is three hundred and fifty six divided by forty eight?
It is seven point forty one.
How much is one thousand five hundred plus ninety seven?
Its one thousand five hundred and ninety seven.
How much is thirty eight times fourteen?
Its five hundred and thirty two.
How much is two million five hundred eighty two thousand six hundred
and twelve minus six hundred and thirteen thousand?
Rossy:
Its one million nine hundred sixty nine thousand six hundred and twelve.
Eduard: Thank you very much Rossy!
Rossy:
Youre welcome.
Vocabulary:
Plus Add Addition Times Multiply Multiplication Minus Subtract
Subtraction Divided by Divide Division To arrive To begin To gather
To celebrate Parade To watch To finish To wear To reply To close
Page 31
UNIT FIFTEEN
How much para precios. Verbos

want to, like to y would like to.
Pronombres Indefinidos.
How much does the sandwich cost?

How much is the sandwich?
How much do the extras cost?
How much are the extras?
How much does the bottled water cost?
How much is the bottled water?
How much + do / does + cosa (s) + cost?

How much + to be + cosa (s)?
Verbos want to, like to y would like to

He wants to play tennis every morning at eight oclock.
I want her to help me with my homework.
I like to feel angry once in a while.
He likes her very much. He wants her to be his partner.
Shed like to have lettuce and apples in the salad.
We would like to sleep ten hours a day.
Pronombres Indefinidos
One
Ones
These
Those
Others
The others
Want to
Like to + verbo (simple)
Would like to
Reemplaza la cosa que se

ha mencionado, hacindole
referencia
de
distintas
maneras.

-
These shoes cost fifty dollars. Those cost forty dollars. I dont like them.
I dont like those t-shirts. I like others. I like blue ones.
Do you like this car? No, I dont. I like the others next door.
I have a yellow pen and she has a red one but Frank has brown ones.
Rossy wants to have a new phone because she doesnt have any.
How much is that stereo? That one costs seventy dollars but these are fifty.
I would like to have cold tea and french fries, please.
I prefer the other food at the restaurant on the corner.
I like to play soccer. I want to play it now. I would like to play for three hours.
Page 32
Dont Forget:
Para preguntar precios se puede utilizar el auxiliar do does o to be, se

debe formular la oracin de acuerdo al auxiliar utilizado.
El verbo want to expresa querer hacer algo o querer alguien para algo.
El verbo like to expresa gusto por alguien o gusto por algo.
Would like to expresa lo que le gustara hacer a alguien en algn momento.
Los Pronombres Indefinidos reemplaza el nombre de la cosa de la que se est
hablando.
One hace referencia a la cosa de la que se habla en singular. Ones hace
referencia a las cosas de la que se habla en plural. These hace referencia a
las cosas de las que se habla que estn cerca. Those hace referencia a las
cosas de las que se habla que estn lejos. Others hace referencia a las cosas
de las que se habla de otro sitio indefinido. The others hace referencia a las
cosas de las que se habla que estn en otro sitio definido.
Lets read:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Would you like to be a math teacher?

No, I wouldnt like to be a math teacher. Would you like to be an actor?
Yes, I would like it. Actors make a lot of money.
Do you like all the attention? You dont have private life.
On a second thought, you are right. Money doesnt buy privacy.
Do you like Angy? Would you like to go out with her?
I like her to study chemistry. She is fantastic with numbers.
Do you want to have this rug?
I dont like that one. I like the ones in the living room.
Do you remember the others from Susies store?
Yes, I do. They are very colourful but I prefer others.
Which rug would Frank like?
He would like stripped or spotted ones.
Do you want to have those curtains on the window?
Yes, they are pretty. How much are they?
They are cheap. They cost thirty five dollars.
Indeed, they are not expensive. I would like to take them with me.
Would you like to have others?
No, I wouldnt. One is enough.
It is indeed. Thank you.
Vocabulary:
To help To be angry To like To cost To buy To remember Stripped
Spotted Cheap Expensive Indeed - Enough
Page 33
UNIT SIXTEEN
Nmeros Ordinales y sus usos.
Nmeros Ordinales
Ordinals Numbers
One
Two
Three
Four
Five
Six
Seven
Eight
Nine
Ten
Eleven
Twelve
First
Second
Third
Fourth
Fifth
Sixth
Seventh
Eighth
Ninth
Tenth
Eleventh
Twelfth
El resto de los nmeros

siguen el mismo orden,
solo se tiene que escribir
la cifra completa y al
ltimo nmero agregarle
la
caracterstica
del
ordinal, ya sea first,
second, third o th
Usos de Nmeros Ordinales
Fracciones
Fractions
1/2
1/3
1/4
1/10
1/25
2/3
4/5
6/7
1 1/2
16 7/9
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
one half a half

one third a third
one fourth a fourth
one tenth a tenth
one twenty fifth
two thirds
four fifths
six sevenths
one and a half
sixteen and seven ninths
Enumeracin de Situaciones
Enumeration of Situations
First, I eat.
Second, I sleep.
Third, I wake up.
Fourth, I eat again.
Fifth, I go out.
Fechas
Dates
January, 2nd
February, 1st
March, 10th
April, 23rd
May, 12th
June, 9th
July, 5th
Rossy is first.
Frank is second.
Angy is third.
Eduard is fourth.
Susie is fifth.
Page 34
Always Remember:

I see her everyday but she doesnt usually see me. I avoid her.
He knows them and they know him. They are friends of us.
I play tennis. I love it. He swims and runs. He loves it.
This is my memory card. It is mine. Its blue. Yours is green.
His speakers sound loud. Mine sound low.
His pencils belong to him. My pencils belong to me.
This is our classroom. It belongs to us. Its the students classroom.
Frank and Eduards cigarettes are strong. Susies are soft.
That is the Smiths cat. This is the Jonas dog.
Whose dog is this? It belongs to the Jonas.
These cigarettes are strong. Whose are they? They are Frank and Eduards.
Whose classroom are the students in? They are in the Institutes classroom.
Let me stay out late, please! Ask your mother.
Can I have a drink? I am very thirsty. Let me have a drink.
Lets wake up early. Tomorrow is an important day.
Lets meet at ten oclock in the morning on Wednesday.
Cant you buy us lunch? We dont have any money here.
How much do these shoes cost? I like them. They cost thirty dollars.
How much is this shirt? Its ten dollars. How much are these? Theyre fifteen.
Lets Practice:
Page 35
UNIT SEVENTEEN
Pasado Simple del to be.

There was / there were.
Present
am
To be
Past
was
is
were
are
I
He
She
It
WAS
I am responsible today.
I was responsible yesterday.
He is in the park now.
He was in the park last week.
They are twenty years old.
They were nineteen years old.
You
We
You
They
WERE
There was a salesman at the door yesterday afternoon.

There was an orange on the street last month.
There were four forks on the table day before yesterday.
There were people in the building this morning at nine oclock.
Past.

-
Where is Frank? I dont know where he is now but he was at his house at six.
The restaurant was great in 2000, but it is awful nowadays.
Is Angy on vacation at the moment? No, she isnt. She was until last week.
You are very smart now, but when you were a child you werent.
I wasnt at the party last night. I stayed in my house because I was tired.
Is there ice cream in the refrigerator? There was on Monday. Look for it.
Were there books on the floor in my bedroom? Yes, there were.
Werent there any pretty flowers to her? Yes, there were many.
There were people in this house once but there isnt any more.
Page 36
Dont Forget:
El pasado del verbo to be es was were. Los pronombres I, he, she, it

utiliza was y you, we, they utiliza were.
El tiempo Pasado Simple expresa una accin o un punto en el pasado que solo
sucedi. El to be expresa lo que era o donde estaba una persona.
Al utilizar pasado, en el complemento de la oracin puede aparecer un
indicador de tiempo que identifica el momento a que nos referimos, el cual
debe estar en pasado.
There was there were es el pasado de there is there are
respectivamente. De igual manera, en su complemento puede aparecer el
indicador de tiempo que debe hacer referencia a algn momento del pasado.
Para formular preguntas, se coloca el to be al inicio de la oracin.
La negacin contrada de was were es wasnt werent
respectivamente.
Lets read:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Hello Frank. How was your day?

How do you do Angy? My day was not good.
Why? Were you upset about something?
I was upset about everything. I was hungry in the morning. I was
suspicious on the bus because there were weird men on it. I was
embarrassed with my friends because I was late. The teachers were rude to
me. My classmates were loud during class. I was unhappy.
I am sorry. That is sad to hear.
Thats not all Angy. My chair wasnt comfortable. I wasnt relaxed. My
partners were shy and nervous during the presentation. I wasnt kind to my
girlfriend. I wasnt pleased with myself.
My day was nice. My teachers were absent-minded, so we were relaxed in
class. My friends were proud of me because I was the best at the university.
I wasnt forgetful. People were nice to me and I wasnt ashamed because I
was late.
I am happy for you. Was there food in the university restaurant?
Yes, there was a lot of food. Wasnt there in your university restaurant?
No, there wasnt any. I was sick, so I was very hungry.
Susie and I were at the beach last Saturday. It was almost empty.
Eduard and I were at the movies day before yesterday. We were on the
stairs because there werent any seats available.
You are very unlucky, Frank. Get away from me.
Vocabulary:
Smart - Pretty - To be upset - To be suspicious - Weird - To be rude - To be loud
To be sad - To be comfortable - To be relaxed - To be shy - To be kind - To forget
To be proud - To be absent-minded - To be sick - To be ashamed - To be late
Page 37
UNIT EIGHTEEN
Pasado Simple de Verbos Regulares.

Auxiliares Do Does Did
Declaraciones Positivas y Negativas en Pasado

I worked hard in my house yesterday.
He borrowed money from them last week.
She called you many times last night.
They arrived from Chicago at noon.
I closed the store early. He closed it late.
He studied a lot for the test.
We fried our meals yesterday night.
I stopped because I was tired.
He controlled his blood pressure.
Suj. + verb. (past) + Comp.
Formulacin de Preguntas
Present
Past
He usually works every day.

- Does he usually work every day?
He worked here last month.

- Did he work here last month?
I study English three times a week.

- Do you study English three times a week?
I studied English at the US.

- Did you study English at the US?
She doesnt permit her daughter to drink.

- Does she permit her daughter to drink?
She permitted her son to drink.

- Did she permit her son to drink?

-
Did you open the window? No, I didnt. Its cold. Did you close it? Yes, I did.
Did he purchase the necklace? Yes, he purchased it. It was cheap.
Did he save money for the holidays? Yes, he did. He didnt spend any.
Were you hungry at noon? Yes, I didnt have any breakfast. I didnt eat.
Did you watch the movie? Yes, I watched it. It wasnt good.
Does he share his snacks? No, he doesnt but he shared some yesterday.
Did you want to smoke a cigarette? No, I didnt. I dont smoke.
Page 38
Dont Forget:
Un verbo en pasado simple expresa una accin sencilla que ya ocurri y est
representada como un punto en el tiempo.
Existen verbos regulares e irregulares. Los regulares forman su Pasado
Simple y Pasado Participio al agregarle ED. Los verbos irregulares se
forman con una palabra diferente que no cumple las reglas de ED.
Los verbos en pasado son los mismos para todos los pronombres, de igual
manera el auxiliar did no cambia en 1ra, 2da ni 3ra persona.
Se le agrega -D a los verbos regulares que ya terminan en E por si
mismos. Se le agrega IED a los verbos regulares que terminen en
consonante seguida de Y. Se le duplica la ltima consonante antes de
agregar ED a los verbos que terminan en Consonante, Vocal, Consonante
por s mismos. Se le agrega ED a los dems verbos que no cumplan ninguna
de las reglas mencionadas anteriormente.
El auxiliar DID es para hacer preguntas y negar oraciones en Pasado
Simple. Es el mismo auxiliar para todos los pronombres y el verbo queda en
forma simple cuando este est presente.
Lets read:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Did you buy the magazine at the newsstand?

Yes, I bought it. Did you go to the convenience store?
Yes, I did. I went there last week. Did you get the medicine at the drugstore?
No, I didnt go there. Did you meet with Rossy at the coffee house?
No, we didnt. We met at the clothing store. Did you cut your hair?
No, I didnt go to the barber shop. Didnt you go to the hair salon?
Yes, I did go there. I dyed my hair black. Do you like it?
Yes, I like it but it looked better before. Did you get a haircut?
No, I didnt. Didnt you have a headache this morning?
Yes, I did have one but it was soft. Did you have a sore throat?
Yes, I did. I screamed yesterday afternoon. Did Rossy have a fever?
Yes, she did. Eduard hurt his leg. He wanted to fly.
Did he again? He is not a bird! Did Susie have a cough?
No, she didnt. She is very healthy.
Did you sign the university documents?
Yes, I signed them on Monday. I handed them two days ago.
Did you travel to Latin America last year?
No, I didnt. It was too expensive. I hope to go this year.
Did you buy the tickets to go?
Yes, I did but I postponed them to this year.
Vocabulary:
To borrow - To stop - To control - To permit - To purchase - To save To dye
To share - To watch - To get - To meet - To cut - To scream - To hurt - To sign
Page 39
UNIT NINETEEN
Preguntas Wh- en Pasado Simple con

to be y Verbos de Accin.
Who
------------- Quin?
What
------------- Qu?
Where ------------- Dnde?

Wh- Questions
How
------------- Cmo?
Why
-------------
When
------------- Cundo?
Which
------------- Cul?
Porqu?
was - were
(to be)
did
(do - does)
Auxiliares para Tiempo Pasado
Estructuras.
Wh- + to be (was were) + sujeto + comp.
Wh- + did + sujeto + verbo + comp.

Who + verbo (past tense) + comp.

-
When did you become a teacher? I became a teacher after high school.
Who was on the sidewalk along our house yesterday? Susie was there.
Where were you all morning? Why did you leave? I got up and went to work.
What did she do last Wednesday? She gave a lot of presents to many people.
How did they pay for the new house? They saved money, then, they bought it.
Why were you angry at Frank? I wasnt angry at him. I was rude to him.
Who did they speak to at school? They spoke to the principal.
Page 40
Dont Forget:
El auxiliar did es el mismo para todos los pronombres.

Los verbos en pasado son los mismos para todos los pronombres, ya que estos
no son conjugados para la 3ra persona.
Al formular Wh- questions, se debe estar pendiente que no se responda a la
pregunta en la misma oracin, es decir, si se pregunta con when, no se debe
decir periodo de tiempo en el complemento, si se pregunta con why, no se
debe decir el porqu o el para qu se hizo la accin y as sucesivamente.
El who que pregunta por el sujeto del complemento (who complemento) va
seguido del auxiliar did para formular la pregunta. El who que pregunta
por el sujeto principal va seguido del verbo en pasado simple.
Lets read:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
What did you do this weekend Frank?

I did many things. It was a nice weekend. I went for a walk to the shore with
my girlfriend on Friday and after, we went to the movies at night. On
Saturday, I ran during the sun rise for a little exercise. In the afternoon, I
met with some friends and we went out for dinner. Sunday was calm. I
visited my parents house. I got a takeout at a near restaurant for lunch.
Did you have fun with your parents? Why did you go?
Yes, I did. We had an excellent day together. We watched football games.
We ate ice cream and cookies. I rented four movies. I gossiped about the
neighbors with my mom. I didnt work late. I slept until ten oclock.
Why didnt you stay home? Who were you with on Sunday?
I stayed home during weekdays. On weekends, I like to go out. Where were
you this weekend? What did you do?
My days off were normal. I stayed home on Saturday. On Sunday, I slept
late and I met some friends at four thirty. We took pictures and joke around.
Which pictures did you keep?
I kept the pictures I was in. Would you like to have one?
Sure. Who took the pictures?
My brother-in-law took them. I was with friends all the afternoon.
Where did you go? Where were you guys?
We didnt do anything special. We just sat on the grass in the park.
When did you sell your car?
I sold it three days ago. I went shopping yesterday and I spent all the money.
Why did you spend it all? Well, I know. You are a woman.
Vocabulary:
To become - To leave - To give - To pay - To speak - To go - Sun rise - Sun set
To meet - To visit - To get - To eat - To rent - To gossip - To sleep - To stay
To take - to keep - To sit - To sell - To spend - To know
Page 41
UNIT TWENTY
Tag Questions. To Take idiomtico.

Verbos preposicionales.
Tag Questions
Frank is twenty one years old, isnt he?
Eduard and Frank arent enemies, are they?
They were at the beach yesterday, werent they?
He wasnt a lazy boy, was he?
Susie works a lot, doesnt she?
We dont study, do we?
You learn English easily, dont you?
You did your homework, didnt you?
Frank didnt find his keys, did he?
I am late today, arent I?
Estructura:
Sentence, tag question?
To Take idiomtico
Does it take courage to parachute?
It takes ten minutes to get there.
Does it take time to do the chores?
What does it take to be an astronaut?
Verbos Preposicionales
Prepositional Verbs
believe in
look after
look for
look out
talk about
wait for
To Take idiomtico
=
Lo que se necesita / Lo que hace falta
go out
go for
get out
get up
get back
take off
take over
turn on
turn off
speak up
break down
come on

-
Angy isnt Rossys sister, is she? Angy and Susie are sisters, arent they?
You would like to have a million dollars, wouldnt you?
He liked to speak up in class, didnt he? He wasnt shy, was he?
It takes achievements to be a CEO, doesnt it? It is not easy, is it?
Mothers always look after their sons, dont they? They believe in them.
Your father talked about computers to you, didnt he? You looked for games.
It takes free time to wait for somebody, doesnt it?
Page 42
Dont Forget:
La funcin del Tag Question es confirmar o negar la informacin de la

oracin dicha. Es el equivalente al verdad? o al no? en espaol.
Los Tag Questions utilizan siempre un auxiliar que debe estar acorde al
tiempo y la estructura de la oracin en forma de pregunta, es decir, auxiliar +
sujeto. Con oraciones afirmativas se coloca el Tag Question en negativo.
Con oraciones negativas se coloca el Tag Question en afirmativo.
El To Take idiomtico se utiliza con oraciones impersonales, es decir, con
el IT como sujeto. El equivalente al espaol sera se necesita. Se le
aplican las estructuras de un verbo.
Los Verbos Preposicionales son expresiones formadas por 2 palabras, un
verbo ms una preposicin o adjetivo. Al variar la preposicin o el adjetivo,
cambiar el significado, sin importar que el verbo no sea cambiado.
Lets read:
Angy:
Eduard:
Angy:
Eduard:
Angy:
Eduard:
Angy:
Eduard:
Angy:
Eduard:
Angy:
Eduard:
Angy:
Eduard:
Angy:
Eduard:
Angy:
Eduard:
Angy:
Eduard:
Angy:
Hello Eduard. You finally got back from work.

Yes, I am finally home. You worked today, didnt you?
No, I didnt. I asked for a day off. I looked after Susie all day. She is sick.
You are a good sister. You went out to have fresh air, didnt you?
Yes, I did it twice. It took me a while to take over the situation. I was scared
because I didnt know what to do.
Susie believed in you. I am sure she gets better as time goes by.
You are right. Why dont you take off your shoes and jacket?
Its cold here. Dont you think? Turn on the heater, please!
Sure. Can you turn off the air conditioner?
Does it take something special to turn it off?
It takes the press of a button. You can do it, cant you?
Yes, I can. Did you wait for Frank today?
Yes, I waited for him. He came at nine oclock and he left at three oclock.
Did you look for his keys? You found them, didnt you?
No, I didnt. They disappeared. Do you have your laptop here?
Yes, I do but it broke down last week. Where is your laptop?
Frank borrowed it this morning. He needed it to make a presentation.
Did he get up early? Did he turn off the light before he left?
Yes, he got up early but he didnt turn off the light before he left.
He never does it. He doesnt take care of our planet, does he?
No, he doesnt. It takes a miracle to make him realize that.
Vocabulary:
To find - To believe - To wait - To turn - To break - To speak - To ask
To be sick - To be scared - To think - To teach - To disappear - To realize
To borrow - To lend To turn on To turn off
Page 43
SPECIAL PRACTICE
Parts of Speech
Nouns: a noun is a word used to name a person, animal, place, thing, and an
abstract idea. The highlighted words in the following sentences are all nouns:
- Late last year our neighbors bought a sheep.
- The bus inspector looked at all the passengers' passes.
Pronouns: a pronoun can replace a noun or another pronoun. You use pronouns
like "he," "which," "none," and "you" to make your sentences less repetitive. In the
following sentences, each of the highlighted words is a pronoun and acts as the
subject of the sentence:
- I was glad to find the bus pass at the bottom of the green knapsack.
- He told her to live with him.
Verbs: the verb is the most important part of the sentence. A verb asserts
something about the subject of the sentence and express actions, events, or states
of being. The verb is the critical element of the predicate of a sentence. The
highlighted words in the following sentences are all verbs:
- Dracula bites his victims on the neck.
- My first teacher was Miss Crawford, but I also remember the janitor.
Adjectives: an adjective modifies a noun or a pronoun by describing, identifying,
or quantifying words. An adjective usually precedes the noun or the pronoun
which it modifies. In the following examples, the highlighted words are adjectives:
- The truck-shaped balloon floated over the treetops.
- The small boat was found on the deep blue sea.
Adverb: an adverb can modify a verb, an adjective, another adverb, a phrase, or a
clause. An adverb indicates manner, time, place, cause, or degree and answers
questions such as "how," "when," "where," "how much". In the following
examples, each of the highlighted words is an adverb:
- Unfortunately, the bank closed at three today.
- The thief ran quickly to avoid the policeman.
Preposition: a preposition shows directions, time, location, using words such as
of, from, in front of. In the following examples, each of the highlighted words is a
preposition:
- According to her, the book is in the room next door.
Page 44
Conjunction: you can use a conjunction to link words, phrases, and clauses, as in
the following examples:
- I ate the pizza and the pasta.
- Call the movers when you are ready.
Interjection: an interjection is a word added to a sentence to give emotion. It is not
grammatically related to any other part of the sentence. Interjections are uncommon
in formal academic prose, except in direct quotations. The highlighted words in the
following sentences are interjections:
- Ouch, that hurt!
- Oh no, I forgot that the exam was today.
Articles: an article is the word that is written before a noun. It means one or
identifies something out of everything. They are a, an, the. The highlighted words
in the following sentences are articles:
- The book is on the table.
- She read a book during class.
- Did you sell an umbrella today?
Lets Practice:
Read the sentences with a partner and decide what parts of speech the
underlined words are. Write the part of speech above the word.
1. My partner and I live in San Diego, California.

2. When did Tomas get there? He is early for the first time.
3. What a beautiful day! The sun shines and the temperature is perfect.
4. Hey! Drive carefully! This is school zone.
5. Are you feeling OK? You seem tired.
6. He walked out of the room when he saw her.
7. Running and biking are great forms of exercise.
Page 45
UNIT TWENTY-ONE
Futuro will y be going to.

Wh- questions en Futuro.
Tiempo Futuro
Auxiliar WILL
I
You
He
She
It
We
You
They
will study
ll study
wont study
Auxiliar BE GOING TO
I
am going to study
am not going to study
He
She
It
is going to study
isnt going to study
We
You
They
are going They

to study
arent going to study
Formulacin de Preguntas
Will he study tomorrow?
Will you forget the lesson?
Will she believe in you?
Will they catch the ball?
Am I going to study next week?

Are you going to travel to the US?
Is he going to leave the country?
Is she going to perform next?
Formulacin de Wh- questions

What will he study tomorrow?
Why will you forget the lesson?
How will she believe in you?
Where are you going to study next week?

When are you going to travel to the US?
Who is going to leave the country?

-
Rossy will go to Italy soon but she is going to Canada in two weeks.
Where is she going to arrive in Canada? What is she going to do?
Somebody knocks at the door. Ill open it. Who will be?
Franks phone rings. Shell get it. What will the person want?
She will paint the front of her house in December. How will she paint it?
We arent going to stay in expensive hotels in Australia.
Page 46
Dont Forget:
Will por ser auxiliar es el mismo para todos los pronombres y el verbo que
se utilice quedar en su forma infinitivo.
Be going to al ser utilizado, se debe colocar el to be conjugado en
presente simple para que exprese futuro.
Will se utiliza cuando se quiere expresar un futuro no planeado,
sugerencias, predicciones sin fundamento, deseos o promesas.
Be going to se utiliza cuando se quiere expresar un futuro planeado,
estructurado o predicciones con fundamento.
Lets read:
Angy:
Eduard:
Angy:
Eduard:
Angy:
Eduard:
Angy:
Eduard:
Angy:
Eduard:
Angy:
Eduard:
Angy:
Eduard:
Angy:
Eduard:
Angy:
Eduard:
Angy:
Eduard:
Tell me Eduard. Will you visit the five continents before you are fifty?
Are there five continents? I didnt know that. Which are they?
They are Australia, Africa, Europe, Asia and America.
Of course I will visit them. I am going to be in Australia by the end of this
year. I am going to travel with my family. We are going to arrive in Sidney
in December, 1st. Are you going to travel with us?
I would like to do it but I wont. I will spend my money on August and I
will be broke by December.
Thats too bad. Dont worry. Ill send you some pictures every day.
Please, do that! I will know Australia by pictures. Where will you go?
We will be in Sidney the first week. Then, we will drive around.
Thats a good plan. I want to travel to South America. I will do it next year.
I will go with you. Would you like it? How will we go?
Well go swimming through the ocean.
Dont be sarcastic. I realized that that was a dumb question.
Will you go to work tomorrow?
I dont want to but I will. You will go, wont you?
No, I wont. I will sleep late tomorrow. I dont work. Im a student.
Are you on vacation? Its cloudy. Its going to rain.
Yes, I am on vacation. You know, I think you will marry a short blonde
woman. I am just predicting without a base.
I dont think I will. I like brunettes. You will get married with a tall blue
eyed man. I am just predicting.
I hope you are right. I am going to meet with Susie at five oclock. I will see
you later.
Sure. I am going to surf the web to search some information. Bye!
Vocabulary:
To forget - To catch - To leave - To perform - To knock - To ring - To stay
To tell - To spend - To be broke - To send - To drive - To swim - Dumb
To be sarcastic - To predict - To marry - To search - Blonde - Brunette
Page 47
UNIT TWENTY-TWO
Verbos Modales: can, could, shall, will,

would, be able to, may, might, should,
ought to, have to, must.
Verbos Modales
CAN COULD BE ABLE TO
I can ride a bike.
He cant beat his opponent.
He could ride a bike when he was five.
We could speak Chinese last month.
He is able to do his homework.
He will be able to lead the group.
I could go tomorrow but I dont want to.
She could work late but she is lazy.
Can he beat his opponent?
Could he ride a bike when he was five?
WOULD MAY MIGHT
SHALL WILL
I shall open the door for you.
We shall not walk you to the door.
I will drive to work next month.
He wont buy a new car next week.
SHALL
I
We
Shall we go now please?

Will they feed my pets?
SHOULD OUGHT TO
HAVE TO MUST
I would go there but Im tired.

He wouldnt smoke but he is stressed.
I may be late tomorrow morning.
I may stay until the end.
I might be late tomorrow morning.
I might stay until the end.
You should work hard.

I ought to work hard.
He has to work hard.
We have to work hard.
She must work hard.
Would you dance with me?

Would they go today?
Would she win the race?
Should you work hard?

Does he have to work hard?
Must she work hard?

-
Will he leave your house early tomorrow? Yes, but there may be traffic.
Can you speak English now? No, I cant but I will be able to speak it soon.
Shall we eat pizza tonight? Lets eat spaghetti, shall we?
Would you make lunch to me? I must do it because I promise. I should leave.
I am very busy so I may not go to the movies tonight. I have to work.
I will be able to speak four languages in three years. I ought to study a lot.
Page 48
Dont Forget:
Los Verbos Modales tienen cada uno diferentes repercusiones sobre el verbo
que modifican la condicin en la cual se realiza la accin. El verbo que se
mencione quedar en forma simple debido a la presencia del Verbo Modal.
Can Could expresan el poder hacer algo en presente y en pasado
respectivamente. Could tambin expresa una condicin en el presente
siendo su significado en espaol podra.
Be able to es el verbo que se utiliza para expresar el poder de hacer una
accin en cualquier tiempo (presente pasado futuro). El verbo principal es
el to be, siendo este el que se conjuga para expresar el tiempo que se desee.
Shall Will expresan tiempo futuro. Shall solo trabaja con los
pronombres I y We y es muy formal, por lo cual poco comn su
utilizacin.
Would expresa una condicin. Su funcin equivalente en el espaol se
forma al agregarle -RIA a los verbos. Ej. He would study = l estudiara.
Would tambin es utilizado para pedir algo de una manera ms formal.
May Might expresan la posibilidad de que ocurra la accin descrita.
Should Ought to son utilizados para aconsejar. No es posible utilizar
Ought to para formular pregunta o para negar.
Have to expresa el deber de hacer algo. Se debe conjugar de acuerdo al
pronombre, es decir, has to para la tercera persona. Utiliza el auxiliar do
does para formular la pregunta en presente y did en pasado, tambin puede
utilizar otros Verbos Modales como el will, should, would, may.
Must expresa obligacin por algo.
Lets read:
What will you do tomorrow at your job? Cant you stay home?
Angy:
Eduard: No, I cant and I shouldnt. I must earn money. I will type contracts. I will
meet with clients. I shall make some decisions. I will have to work long
hours. I ought to work as a team with my partners. What will you do?
I have to make a presentation. I will give it day after tomorrow. We could
Angy:
meet and do it together, couldnt we?
Eduard: We could meet at six oclock. Before six, I might be at work.
Sure. I shall wait for you in my house. I will be able to make an excellent
Angy:
presentation with your help.
Eduard: Yes, you will but you ought to work a lot on it. I am not going to do it for
you. You can begin before I arrive, so you would have more time.
I must leave now. Ill see you tomorrow afternoon.
Angy:
Vocabulary:
To ride - To beat - To lead - To buy - To bring - To begin - To stay - To dance
To win - To promise - To be busy - To earn - To type - To wait - To see - To leave
Page 49
UNIT TWENTY-THREE
Preguntas especificas con How

Segundo uso de Will y May
Preguntas con How
How many
How much
How long
How often
How deep
How far
How old
How soon
How big
How tall
How late
How well
-------------
Cunto? (contable)
Cunto? (incontable)
Cunto? (tiempo / distancia)
Qu tan seguido?
Qu tan profundo?
Qu tan lejos?
Qu edad?
Qu tan pronto?
Qu tan grande? (cosa)
Qu tan alto? (persona)
Qu tan tarde?
Qu tan bien? (accin)
Usos del Will y May

WILL
MAY
The stereo doesnt make a sound.

It wont work.
Can I come in?

Yes, you can.
No, you cant.
May I come in?

Yes, you may.
No, you may not.
Can I leave now?
May I leave now?
She is angry at me.

She wont teach me math.

-
How long is it from here to our house? Its about thirty minutes. I wont walk.
How deep is the pool? Its three meters deep. How deep can you swim in?
How far do we have to go? We have to go all the way to Susies store.
How old is the car? It is from 1998. How old is the driver? He is fifty.
How soon will you get here? I am in a rush but I may be late.
How tall is your brother? He is 194 cm. How big is the truck? Its 200 cm.
How late did you arrive to the airport? I arrived an hour late.
How well did you do this semester at school? I did well. I got good grades.
Page 50
Dont Forget:
Al preguntar con how ms un adjetivo o adverbio se pregunta qu tanto hay

presente del adjetivo o adverbio que se menciona en la accin descrita.
Se necesita un auxiliar para formular la pregunta, el cual puede ser el to be,
do does - did o algn Verbo Modal. Se debe conjugar el verbo de acuerdo
a la estructura y a la gramtica utilizada en la oracin.
Para que el will tenga la funcin de querer, el contexto debe estar
especifico para que se logre, de otra manera, tiende a confusin.
May para pedir por algo se puede utilizar en cualquier momento sin ninguna
confusin en sustitucin del can. El may es ms formal.
Lets read:
Rossy:
Frank:
Rossy:
Frank:
Rossy:
Frank:
Rossy:
Frank:
Rossy:
Frank:
Rossy:
Frank:
Rossy:
Frank:
Rossy:
Frank:
Rossy:
Frank:
Rossy:
Frank:
Rossy:
Frank, how often do you come to this restaurant?

I come here about twice a month.
How much do you eat? How many dishes do you order?
I am usually hungry, so I eat a lot. I normally order three dishes, one
appetizer, one entre and one dessert.
You do eat a lot. How big are the dishes here? How well do they cook?
They are really big. Their diameter measures thirty centimeters. They have
cooks from all around the world. Their food is great.
How far are we from our place? How long does it take to get there?
We are two blocks away. It will take us ten minutes to get there.
How many napkins do we have on the table? Do we have pepper?
We have many napkins and much pepper. Where are the waiters? Nobody
comes here. We are the costumers and they wont take our order.
How long do we have here? When are they going to attend us?
I hope they do it soon. I am hungry. How late were you this morning?
I wasnt late. I was very proud of that. May I go to the bathroom?
Go ahead and hurry up. The waiter will come soon.
Order for me please! I would like to have grill chicken with salad.
How big would you like your dish? What do you want to drink?
I want my dish to be small. I would like to have a glass of lemon juice.
Sure. I will order for you. You may go now. I wont get up. I am very tired.
You are always tired. Ill be right back.
The food was really good, wasnt it? When will we come again?
Yes, it was. We should come again tomorrow.
Vocabulary:
Deep - Soon - To be tall - Dish - To eat - To cook - To measure - Block - Napkin
Costumer - To order - To attend - To hope - Go ahead - Small
Page 51
UNIT TWENTY-FOUR
Direcciones. Verbos Preposicionales.

Direcciones
I am lost. How can I get to the main museum?
- Go straight until the Fifth Avenue.
- Turn to the left and then immediately to the right.
- Go up the stairs of a building next to a hospital.
- Go down the Seventh Avenue.
- Move through some trees and you get to the main museum.
Preposiciones
de Lugar
by
inside
above
below
beside
under
up
down
Verbos Preposicionales
through
near
outside of
between
along
beyond
in front of
in back of
Agree with
Allow for
Blow up
Break in
Break up
Catch up
Come across
Come into
Come out
Come over
Care about
Take care
Collide with
Make up
next to
on top of
beneath
among
around
against
opposite
behind
Concentrate on
Depend on
Dream about
Happen to
Hear about
Hear of
Insist on
Laugh/smile at
Live on
Shout at
Shout to
Succeed in
Suffer from
Talk over
Think about
Think of
Look down
Look for
Look into
Look up
Get ahead
Get along
Get away
Get in
Fall behind
Figure out
Make do
Get rid
Page 52
Always Remember:

I was in the beach last week. Rossy and Eduard were with me.
My friends were great with me when I was sick.
There was sand inside the car and there were many cans of beer.
Were you at your house? Was there food for the weekend?
Did you build the tree house for your children? Yes, I built it last week.
Did he smoke three packs of cigarettes in a day? Yes, he smoked them.
When did he smoke them? Why did he smoke them yesterday?
What did he do after he finished? How did he feel?
Who smoked three packs of cigarettes? Who did he smoke them with?
It takes ten minutes to understand the lesson, doesnt it?
It took him two months to learn how to swim.
I will answer the telephone and afterwards I am going to watch a movie.
He can work. He could work. He should work. He ought to work.
I may study. I have to study. I must study. I will be able to study. I shall study.
How wet are you? How pretty is she? How small is the computer?
Lets Practice:
NOTA: cada estudiante debe seleccionar un tema para realizar su exposicin

al finalizar este libro.
Page 53
UNIT TWENTY-FIVE
Tiempo Continuo en Presente y Pasado.

Reglas para Agregar ING
Tiempo Continuo
I am watching T.V.
I am taking a shower right now.
Are you learning English now?
He is not sleeping at the moment.
He is leaving the office.
They are taking pictures of the sights.
He is tying his shoes now.
She is swimming now.
We are sitting in our chair.
I was watching T.V. yesterday.
He was not sleeping at night.
They were taking pictures of the sights.
We were sitting in our chair during class.
Presente Continuo
Suj. + to be + verb. (ing) + comp.
To be + suj. + verb. (ing) + comp.
Pasado Continuo
Suj. + to be (was were) +
verb. (ing) + comp.
Reglas
Cuando el verbo termine en la letra E, esta se elimina y se agrega ING.
Cuando el verbo termine en las letras IE, estas se sustituyen por Y y luego
agrega ING.
Cuando el verbo termine en consonante-vocal-consonante, se le duplica la
ultima consonante de la palabra y luego se agrega ING.
Verbo que no acepte lo mencionado antes, se le agrega ING sin cambios.

-
They are reading their books and eating chocolate.

What are you doing? Why aren't you doing your homework?
I am studying to become a doctor. I am coming to school everyday.
Are you working on any special projects at work? Yes, I am.
She is always coming to class late. She never wakes up on time.
She is dying to see her favorite actor live.
He is selling his car today because he is traveling tomorrow to Australia.
Page 54
Dont Forget:
El Presente Continuo expresa una accin que se est realizando en el

momento. Se sobreentiende que comenz en el pasado pero no enfoca ese
periodo de tiempo.
El Pasado Continuo expresa una accin que comenz en el pasado, termin en
el pasado y se realiz la accin durante ese periodo de tiempo.
No realizar los cambios adecuados al tipo de verbo antes de agregar ING es
gramaticalmente incorrecto en el idioma.
En el Presente Continuo, el periodo de tiempo que se puede colocar en el
complemento son aquellos que hagan referencia al ahora y nada ms.
El verbo to be nunca puede faltar para formular el Tiempo Continuo y este
debe estar conjugado en el tiempo adecuado acorde a la accin.
Lets read:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Hello sister. What are you doing?

I am withdrawing some money from the cash machine. Why are you asking?
I am being curious. Why are you doing that?
Because I dont have any cash. Did you talk to Frank?
No, I didnt call him. I forgot. Call him now.
Hey, Frank. How are you doing?
Hello Angy. I am good. Why are you calling?
Im calling to ask you whether or not were going to meet to watch a movie.
Sure. I am playing tennis now but I will stop in a little while.
Where are you playing tennis? Who are you playing tennis with?
I am playing in the courts near my house. I am with Eduard.
I am with Susie. We were eating breakfast this morning and now we are
buying the movie.
What are you buying? I was talking to Rossy this morning. She is going to
come with us.
We bought a new one. I forgot the name. We are walking around the mall.
Im getting tired.
I am leaving now. I am going to continue my game. See you in a while.
What is Frank doing right now?
He was playing tennis with Eduard. We are going to meet in a couple hours.
OK. Lets go home. We are wasting much time here.
We are making exercise. We are burning calories while we are walking.
You are right but lets go home.
Vocabulary:
To learn - To sit - To sleep - To read - To die - To sell - To withdraw - To ask
To be curious - To talk - To call - To stop - To burn - To walk - To waste
Page 55
UNIT TWENTY-SIX
Tiempo Continuo con Verbos Modales.

Uso de While. Futuro cercano ING.
Tiempo Continuo con Verbos Modales

I could be washing my clothes now.
He will be working late by then.
She would be arranging the books.
Should he be filing the receipts?
He might be leaving now.
Must I be cleaning my room?
Suj. + Verb. Modal + to be +

Verb. (ing) + comp.
Verb. Modal + suj. + to be +
Verb. (ing) + comp?
Futuro Cercano con ING

I am watching a movie tonight.
We are flying to Canada next month.
He is getting married in two months.
Are they playing tennis this weekend?
Se indica el tiempo futuro en el

complemento de la oracin.
Uso de While
She smells the food while I am cooking it.
We were shaking hands while we talked.
I should be leaving while you are coming.
He is talking to her while she is talking to me.
While = mientras

-
I am not learning German, because this is an English class.

Angy is studying hard for her exams this week. She should be resting now.
When are you visiting your dentist? I am seeing my dentist on Wednesday.
Are you doing anything tonight? No, I am not. We should go out to dinner.
Susie was reading yesterday while I was listening to the radio.
Who are you writing to? I am writing to my friends in Germany.
Where in Germany are they living? I dont know where they are living.
I am sending a message to my sister by phone. I couldnt contact her by mail.
She should be shining her shoes tomorrow while he is dressing up.
Page 56
Dont Forget:
El Tiempo continuo expresa una accin que estamos haciendo en el presente,

una accin que est pasando alrededor de nosotros o acciones que pasaran en
un futuro cercano.
El verbo to be siempre debe estar presente en la estructuracin de este
tiempo, debe estar conjugado adecuadamente de acuerdo al momento de la
accin.
Al formular una oracin con algn Verbo Modal, el verbo to be queda en su
forma simple por la presencia del auxiliar. Se utiliza el verbo modal para
hacer preguntas y negar.
While es utilizado para expresar una accin que pasa al mismo tiempo que
otra.
Lets read:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Hello Rossy. Can you hear me? The line is very bad.
Yes, I can barely hear you. Why are you calling me?
I am calling to see how you are. What are you doing?
I am doing well. I am working outdoors now. I am watching the behavior of
animals. Where are you calling?
I am calling from my house. I am doing nothing, so I was bored.
What were you doing before you called me?
I just told you. I was doing nothing. What are you doing while you are
talking to me?
I was working outdoors before, but now I am going home. Are you
travelling tonight to your parents house?
Yes, I am going there tonight. I am leaving at eight oclock and I am coming
back tomorrow night. Do you want to come with me?
I would like to but I am meeting with my family tonight. We are having
dinner and then we will spend some time together.
Thats nice. Enjoy your time with your family. What are you planning for
tomorrow night? We could get together and do something.
That sounds fine with me. What are we doing?
We may go to a coffee shop to chat and catch up with one another.
I agree with you. We could be drinking coffee while we talk.
Sure. I will pick you up at eight oclock. Wait for me.
Dont be late. I will be watching T.V. while I wait for you.
OK. I am going to hang up. See you tomorrow.
Vocabulary:
To behave - To smell - To fly - To shake - To talk - To learn - To rest - To visit
To contact - To listen - To shine - To dress up - To hear - To meet - To enjoy
To plan - To get together - To catch up - To pick up - To wait - To hang up
Page 57
UNIT TWENTY-SEVEN
Comparativo de Igualdad as as
Would rather y prefer para expresar
preferencia por algo.
Comparativo de Igualdad
She is as tall as her father.
I am as intelligent as everybody.
Susie drinks as much water as Angy.
Does Frank eat as much as me?
He has as many pencils as her.
as (adj.) as = tan (adj.) como
Would rather y prefer para Preferencia

I would rather quit my job.
He would rather lose some weight.
Would they rather lend or borrow money?
I would rather you didnt go.
Would he rather you spoke in English?
I prefer to quit my job.
He prefers losing some weight.
Do they prefer to lend or to borrow money?
I would prefer you didnt go.
Would he prefer you spoke English?
Suj + would rather + verb. (simple)

+ comp.
Suj + prefer + to + Verb. (simple) + comp.

Suj + prefer + Verb. (ing) + comp.

-
Would you rather be as tall as me? No, I wouldnt.

Do you prefer to be as short as your sister? Yes, I would rather be short as her.
Do you throw the ball as fast as me? Yes, I do but I prefer to throw it slow.
Would Angy rather wear a skirt or pants? She prefers to wear pants.
Does Frank prefer to sweep the floor or the windows?
Frank likes to sweep the floor and the windows as well.
Would you rather steal or work to make money?
I would much rather work than steal to earn money.
Do you work as hard as me? Yes, I work as hard and well as you.
Did you spill as much milk as her? Yes, I did. I spilled as much as her.
Page 58
Dont Forget:
El comparativo de igualdad compara adjetivos entre personas o cosas. El

as as siempre rodear al adjetivo y este no influye ni se ve influido por el
verbo o pronombre que se coloque en la oracin.
Would rather es un auxiliar, por lo tanto, se le aplica las reglas de un
auxiliar, es decir, es la misma forma para todos los pronombres y el verbo que
se usa va siempre en infinitivo. Se utiliza el mismo would para preguntar y
negar la oracin.
Prefer es un verbo, por lo tanto, se le aplican las reglas de un verbo, es
decir, el verbo se conjuga para pronombres en 3ra persona, el verbo que da la
accin que se prefiere va en infinitivo precedido de to, o con ING sin
diferencia en el significado. Necesita del auxiliar adecuado de acorde al
tiempo para preguntar.
Lets read:
Eduard: You will like this coffee shop, Rossy. It is as good as Marys.
I hope so. I dont know this one. Would you rather this one than Marys?
Rossy:
Eduard: I prefer Marys to this one, but Marys isnt as near to our house as this one.
I would rather not to drive that far.
Yes, I know. You are lazy. Would you rather walk than drive?
Rossy:
Eduard: What kind of question is that? I would much rather drive than walk.
We have to take care of our planet. Walking doesnt produce as much
Rossy:
pollution as driving.
Eduard: Do you prefer to walk or to drive? Do you pollute a lot?
I prefer riding a bicycle. Everybody should realize the pollution we are
Rossy:
causing. We must reduce our carbon footprints.
Eduard: Do people around the world contaminate as much as we do?
Yes, everybody contributes to increase the level of pollution on Earth.
Rossy:
Eduard: You made me realize what its happening. Its true. Skies are getting brown.
Are you going to contaminate as much as you do nowadays?
Rossy:
Eduard: No, I will reduce it. I am going to make a change.
Im very proud of you Eduard. Would you rather milk or black coffee?
Rossy:
Eduard: Id like to have some tea. I dont drink as much coffee as you do.
Is your car as fast as Franks?
Rossy:
Eduard: No, it isnt as fast as his but it is as fast as yours.
Would you rather have a new one?
Rossy:
Eduard: Of course I do. Who wouldnt rather have a new car?
Rossy:
You are right. Everybody prefers having it but not paying it.
Vocabulary:
To quit - To lose - To be short - To throw - To wear - To sweep - To steal
To earn - To spill - To hope - To be proud - To produce - Pollution - To pollute
To cause - To reduce - Carbon footprint - To increase - To happen - To contribute
Page 59
UNIT TWENTY-EIGHT
Comparativos y Superlativos
desigualdad de una y dos silabas.
Auxiliar Had better
de
Comparativos y Superlativos de desigualdad

I am taller than my father.
He eats faster than me.
Is my room cleaner than yours?
He runs slower than Frank.
She is bigger than her boyfriend.
Angy is crazier than Susie.
Is English easier than Spanish?
Comparativo:
Adj.-er + than = ms (adj) que
I am the tallest in my family.

We are the smallest here.
Is my room the cleanest in the house?
Am I the craziest person you know?
Is English the easiest language on Earth?
Superlativo:
The + Adj. + est = el (la) ms
Auxiliar Had better

You had better take a nap in the afternoon.
We had better not stay here until it begins to rain. Suj. + had better + verb. (simple)
My brother had better get here soon!
+ comp.
My wife had better make lunch to me.
You had better watch the way you talk to me!

-
Who is the tallest among us? Frank is the tallest man here.
Is Rossy shier than Susie? Yes, she is but Angy is the shiest among them.
Is Frank funnier than Eduard? Yes, he is funnier but Susie is the funniest.
I had better go now. I dont want to make a mess here.
Does Eduard talk faster than Frank? No, he doesnt. Frank talks the fastest.
I drive faster than Eduard. Do you really? I had better not go with you then.
I had better study now because tomorrow I will leave earlier than today.
Page 60
Dont Forget:
El comparativo usa un adjetivo para comparar con una cosa o persona. Se

forma al agregarle ER al adjetivo.
El superlativo usa un adjetivo para comparar con el resto. Se forma al
agregarle the delante del adjetivo y -EST al final.
Los comparativos y superlativos mostrados en esta leccin son para adjetivos
de una o dos silabas.
Had better expresa lo que se quiere hacer por deseo o preferencia. No vara
con ningn pronombre y el verbo que se utilice siempre queda en infinitivo.
Para formular pregunta se debe cambiar a should.
Lets read:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Who has the tiniest car?

I have the tiniest car and Frank has the biggest one.
Who wears the shiniest shoes?
I do when I dress formally but Susie normally does. How old are you?
I am twenty-four. Am I younger than you?
No, you are not. You are older. I am twenty-two. How much older are you?
I am two years older. How old is Frank?
He is twenty-one. He is one year younger than me. Is he stronger than you?
Yes, he is. He is bigger and heavier, so he must be stronger.
Am I shorter than you?
Yes, you are the shortest among all our friends. Do you like Martinis?
No, I dont. Martinis are drier than whiskey.
They are the driest of all drinks. Is Susie ugly?
Yes, she is. Is she uglier than Angy?
No, she isnt. Angy is the prettiest girl I know. Do you like hot climate?
No, I dont. I had better not go out. I had better stay in my house.
Yes, I agree with you. Is your house white?
Yes, it is but your house is whiter than mine. Should you order a cookie?
I had better order a piece of cake. You had better order some water.
Is my car newer than yours? You drank your tea faster than me.
No, yours is the newest among our group of friends.
I had better call Angy. She is alone now.
Dont worry. She isnt the loneliest person in the world.
Vocabulary:
To be crazy - To be easy - To be shy - To be funny - To make a mess - To be tiny
To be shiny - To be young - To be old - To be strong - To be short - To be fat
To be dry - To be ugly - To be pretty - To be new - To be alone - To feel lonely
Page 61
UNIT TWENTY-NINE
Comparativos y Superlativos
desigualdad de tres silabas o ms.
de
Comparativos y Superlativos de desigualdad

Frank is more adventurous than Eduard.
My house is more colorful than yours.
Are we more elegant than them?
He was more concerned yesterday than now.
Doing your chores is more important than playing.
We are more successful than them.
Frank is the most adventurous person.
My house is the most colorful of all.
Susie is the most elegant woman.
Fruits are the most nutritious food.
Comparativo:
More + adj. + than
Superlativo:
The most + adj.

Comparativo
Superlativo
Good
--
Better than
--
The best
Bad
--
Worse than
--
The worst
Less
--
Less than
--
The least

-
How are you going to be better than him? Im going to practice more.
Why should he smoke less than you? Because he is more cautious.
Are you the worst singer in the world? Yes, but I am the best bathroom singer.
Who has the least money today? Frank has the least and Rossy has the most.
When will the best movie win an Oscar? It will win one very soon.
I speak English better than you but the teacher speaks it the best.
He is more talented when he acts in theater plays and less talented on T.V.
Page 62
Dont Forget:
Los comparativos y superlativos mostrados en esta leccin son para adjetivos

de tres o ms silabas.
Se utiliza more than para comparar un adjetivo con una persona o cosa.
Se utiliza the most para comparar un adjetivo con el resto.
Good bad less son excepciones porque sus comparativos y superlativos
se forman con palabras nuevas que no cumplen las reglas mostradas pero
estos se utilizan de la misma manera.
Lets read:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Who is more famous, a T.V actor, a sport player or a band singer?

I think a band singer is the most recognized. What do you think?
I believe a sport player is more recognized than the others.
What is the most outstanding sport?
The best sport is car racing. It is the most exciting. Dont you think?
It is more exciting than baseball but less interesting than tennis.
I dont agree. You are like Frank. He loves tennis as much as his career.
Tennis is tougher than car racing because you need to run a lot.
You are right but car racing is much more dangerous than tennis.
I agree. In fact, I think it is the most dangerous sport of all.
Tennis is more competitive than car racing. What other sport do you like?
I like regular ones, such as basketball and football.
They are the most well-known sports in the US.
Yes, they are. They make the largest quantity of money.
What did you think about the coffee shop? Did you like it?
It is more comfortable than Marys and less expensive. I liked it!
The waiters at Marys are friendlier and more helpful.
They may get paid better there. They are more encouraged to work.
That makes sense. Are you the worst tennis player in your family?
No, I am the best tennis player in my family. Are you the least smart?
No, I am not the least smart in my family, but I am the most charming.
Is your food as delicious as Franks?
No, it isnt. It is more delicious than his.
I dont believe that. He is the best cook I know.
I am going to cook the best food you will ever eat in your life.
Vocabulary:
To be concerned - To be successful - To be elegant - To be cautious - To be tough
To be talented - To be famous - To be recognized - To be outstanding
To need - To be well-known - To be friendly - To be helpful - To encourage
Page 63
UNIT THIRTY


I am a student.
They are students too.
I am also a student.
He eats too much.

She eats too much too.
I also eat too much.
- Oracin + too
I am a student as well.
They eat too much as well.
She isnt a student either.

She doesnt smoke either.
- Oracin + as well
- Suj. + also + verb.

- Suj. + to be + also
- Oracin ( - ) + either

OBLIGACIN
DEBER
CONSEJO
You must stop smoking.

Must you stop smoking?
You have to stop smoking.

Do you have to stop smoking?
You should stop smoking.

Should you stop smoking?
He must do the dishes.

Must he do the dishes?
He has to do the dishes.

Does he have to do the dishes?
He should do the dishes.

Should he do the dishes?
We must pay our bills.

Must we pay our bills?
We have to pay our bills.

Do we have to pay our bills?
We should pay our bills.

Should we pay our bills?
Yes, we must.
No, we mustnt.
Yes, we have to.

No, we dont have to.
Yes, we should.
No, we shouldnt.

-
The teacher speaks English. His students speak English too.

You mustnt make noise. Your friend mustnt make noise either.
He shouldnt tear up the documents. Angy is doing it but she shouldnt either.
She has to shut the door. She should also shut the window.
I had to cook and also set the table. Do I have to clean the kitchen as well?
Please, hold the ladder for me. Should I mix the paint as well?
Page 64
Dont Forget:
Also es usado en oraciones afirmativas para expresar similitud. Se coloca

despus del verbo to be y antes de los dems verbos.
Too tiene la misma funcin de also para expresar similitud pero se coloca
al final de la oracin.
Either es usado en oraciones negativas para expresar similitud. Se coloca al
final de la oracin.
Must expresa una obligacin y should un consejo. Have to expresa un
poco de ambos, es un deber.
Lets read:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Do you cook Rossy?

No, I dont cook. Angy doesnt cook either. We prefer to go out.
Who knows how to cook, besides Frank and me?
Susie is a good cook. My friends are also good cooks.
When are we going to your house to have dinner?
We will go soon. I want to go to your house too.
Sure. Frank and I will cook for you girls. You must bring your friends.
Ok. I will tell them. You have to cook something with eggplants, peppers,
tomatoes, lettuce, potatoes, onions, garlic, leeks, cabbage and spinach.
I can see that you like vegetables I like them too.
They are very healthy. My friends like them as well, but Angy doesnt like
them and Susie either.
They dont know what they are missing.
I agree with you. Lets put a date to this plans.
Sure. What about next weekend?
No, I cant. I must travel abroad to meet some clients and Frank does too.
How long will the trip last?
It will last one week, so we will be able to do this in two weeks from now.
Thats a nice date. Im free of my duties by then. Is this your house?
Yes, It is. Thanks for the evening. I had a wonderful time.
I did too. I hope it will repeat soon. Have a good night.
I hope too. I will call my friends tomorrow. Be in touch.
Vocabulary:
To make noise - To tear up - To shut - To hold - To mix - Ladder - Besides
To know - To cook - To go - To bring - To set - To speak - To do - To miss
To agree - To put - To travel - To last - To be free - To repeat - To be in touch
Page 65
SPECIAL PRACTICE
Alanis Morisette
What if God was one of us Lyrics
If God had a name what
___________________________And
would you ______________
If you were faced with him in
____________________ what
_______________ if you had just one
question?
Yeah, Yeah, _________________
Yeah, Yeah, _________________
Yeah Yeah yeah yeah yeah
What if God was one of us?
Just a _____________________
Just a _____________________
Trying to make ______________
Yeah Yeah yeah yeah

____________ slob like one of us
Just a stranger on the bus
Trying to make his way home
Like a holly Rolling Stone
Back up to Heaven all alone
Just trying to make his way home
Nobody calling on the phone
______________ the Pope maybe in
Rome.
Vocabulary:
If God had a face,

What would it _______________
And would you want to see
If __________ meant that you would
have to believe
In things like ________________ and
the saints and __________________
Yeah Yeah God is great
Yeah Yeah God is good
Yeah Yeah yeah yeah yeah
Just a slob like one of us
Just a stranger on the bus
_______________ his way home
Just trying to make his way home
____________________ all alone
Nobody _______________ the phone
except for the Pope _______________
Yeah Yeah God is great
Yeah Yeah God is good
Page 66
Oh it's what you do to me

Plain White Ts
Hey There Delilah Lyrics
Hey there Delilah

_____________ in New York City?
I'm _____________ miles away
But girl tonight you look ________
___________
Times Square ______ shine
__________ you
I swear it's true
Hey there Delilah
____________ about the distance
I'm right there if you ___________
Give this song ___________ listen
Close your eyes
Listen to my voice it's my disguise
_________________
What you do to me
Hey there Delilah
I know times are _____________
But just believe me _____
Someday ______________with this
guitar
_______________
We'll have the life we knew we would
_______________
Hey there Delilah
I've got so much ___________
_______________ I wrote to you
would take your breath ________
I'd write it all
___________in love with me
______________
We'd have it all

A thousand miles _____________
But they've got planes and trains and
cars. I'd walk to you if I had no other
way.
Our friends would all make fun of us
and _____________________ because
we know
That none of them have felt this way
Delilah I can promise you
That by the time we ___________
The world will __________ be the
same
And _________________
Hey there Delilah
You be good and don't you miss me
Two more years and ___________
with school
And I'll be making history like I do
You know _________________
We can do whatever we want to
Hey there Delilah here's to you
_________________
What you do to me.
Vocabulary:

Page 67
UNIT THIRTY-ONE
Lectura. Practica general gramatical de

las unidades 1 a la 30.
English around the World.

English is spoken as a first language by several countries including Great Britain,
Australia, New Zealand, South Africa, Canada, and the United States. While all of
these countries share the same mother tongue, there are some differences in the way
they speak and write.
The first difference is in the accent. Each country has its own accent. And within
each country there are a variety of accents called regional accents.
Another difference is the spelling of some words, like color and colour, or theater and
theatre.
And a third difference is that some of the words are not the same at all. For example,
Americans say restroom, Canadians say washroom, and the British say W.C. (water
closet.) But all of these words have the same meaning (the room where the toilet is
located.)
So which English is the best English to learn? Well, there is no best English. They
are all equally good and correct. But two things may help you decide which one is
best for you to study.
First of all, where do you live? If you are from South America, for example, you will
probably have more exposure to North American English. If you live in Europe,
most likely you will be more exposed to British English.
The second thing to think about is why you are learning English. Is it for business?
travel? to watch movies? Think about the kind of English you plan to use and focus
on understanding people from that area.
But no matter where you study English or whether it's British, American, Australian,
or whatever, it's good to know a little about English in other countries.
Page 68
Lets Practice:
What was the reading about? Answer the questions given in the article.
Page 69
UNIT THIRTY-TWO
Pay attention to the presentations:
Interaccin
entre
estudiantes.
Preguntas y respuestas sobre
exposiciones.
Lets Practice:
1. Take notes of all your friends presentations.
Page 70
2. Ask questions to your friends to answer your doubts about the topics.
Write the questions and the answers.
Page 71
SECOND
LEVEL
j{txx ux|xx |{ yxx|z uxvx xt|A5

@ U|t gtv
Page 72
UNIT ONE
Lectura,
entendimiento
rpido
obtencin de idea principal.
How to Make an Essay.

One good way to make an essay go from good to great is to make sure that it
flows. One of the most common problems that essay writers face is losing the reader
with choppy transitions between paragraphs. Luckily, with a little practice, this
problem has a fairly simple solution.
Steps:
Write the main objective of the essay at the top of the page on a sheet of
paper.
Start writing each paragraph with a topic sentence which has to explain what
the paragraph will be about.
The first paragraph has to be an introduction in which you have to give ideas
to be later developed in your essay. The last paragraph has to be a conclusion
in which you have to give ending ideas, final thoughts and personal opinions.
The middles ones are about explaining the ideas you gave in the introduction.
Read each paragraph carefully and summarize the main topic of each in a
simple word or phrase. List these topics on the sheet of paper.
Put the first sheet of paper aside and explain what you are trying to convey
through your essay out loud or in your head without looking at the essay or
the list of topics. As you explain your point naturally and in your own words,
jot down each topic you cover as you are going through your explanation on a
separate sheet of paper.
Compare the topic list from step 2 with the topic list from step 4, and change
the order of your paragraphs to match the way that you would naturally
explain your objective.
Read through your essay from the beginning, with the paragraphs rearranged
in the most natural order, pausing at the beginning of each new paragraph.
After placing transitional sentences at the beginning of each paragraph, read
the essay from the beginning. If there is any place where the essay does not
sound like a well informed explanation of the objective to a friend, add
transitional sentences in the weak spots. Your essay should now have a
cohesive, natural flow.
Page 73
Lets Practice:
What was the reading about? According to your point of view, what is the
most useful step? What did the reading try to teach you? What does it advise?
Page 74
UNIT TWO
Pronombres reflexivos. Oraciones con

dos sujetos y dos verbos.
Pronombres Reflexivos
Nota
Myself
Yourself
Himself
Herself
Itself
Ourselves
Yourselves
Themselves
by + Pronombre Reflexivo
Se usan para dar

nfasis
sobre
la
misma persona en
funcin al verbo.
Se usa para indicar

que la persona est
sola o realiz la
accin sola.
Oraciones con dos sujetos y dos verbos

V. conjugado
V. infinitivo
Sujeto + verbo + sujeto + to + verbo + complemento

P. Personal
P. Objetivo

-
I looked at myself in the mirror and noticed I was sleepy.

That plate is very hot. Don't burn yourself!!
My boss wants me to learn English because I am going to work abroad.
Do you sometimes talk to yourself when you are alone?
Did you tell your father to pick you up after class today?
Who are you with? I am by myself at my house.
We enjoyed ourselves at the movies. Susie hurt herself falling down the stairs.
Page 75
Dont Forget:
Los pronombres reflexivos hacen que la accin recaiga sobre el mismo sujeto
que se menciona para hacer nfasis.
Cada sujeto tiene su pronombre reflexivo correspondiente, es decir, Rossy
herself; Frank himself; Angy and I ourselves; y as sucesivamente, no es
posible intercambiarlos.
Al colocar by delante de un pronombre reflexivo, este indica que la accin
la realiza la persona sola o que la misma est sin compaa.
Las oraciones con dos sujetos y dos complementos son muy comunes al
hablar, es posible que posea ms sujetos y ms verbos, solo se colocan en el
orden adecuado de ideas.
Lets read:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Hey Rossy, long time no see. How are you doing?

Hi. Yes, I dont remember the last time I saw you. When was it?
It was at Franks birthday party. You were by yourself.
Right. I told my friends to join but they didnt want to.
They seem to be boring, arent they? They didnt want to go.
No, they arent. They were busy at the time. They wanted me to stay.
It was good you didnt because we had a nice time.
Thats true. So, do you need to buy something to take home?
Yes, thats why Im here. My sister told me to do her a favor.
Thats nice of you, but why couldnt she do it by herself?
Because shes home taking care of our father. He is sick.
Cant he take care of himself? Does he need you guys to be ok?
He doesnt but we dont want him to be by himself.
I see your point. When Im sick, I dont like to be alone.
What are you doing here? Tell me about yourself.
I need to buy some groceries because Im going to cook.
Really? Do you cook? I wouldnt imagine that show.
Thats mean. I told you myself that I was a good cook at Franks party.
I remember now. I was just kidding. What are you going to cook?
I dont know yet. Can you give me some ideas?
I dont have a clue. You should take a look at a recipe book.
I think I will. Im going to pick something fancy; anyway, if you want to
stop by, youre welcome. Our friends are going to be there.
Eduard: Sure, I thought you would never ask. See you at your house.
Vocabulary:
Mirror - To burn - Alone - To hurt - To fall - To remember - To stay - Drowsy
To be true - To take care - Groceries - To imagine - Clue - Recipe - Fancy
Page 76
UNIT THREE
Oraciones
con
un
verbo
dos
complementos. Posesivo of.
Oraciones con un verbo y dos complementos

Sujeto + verbo + Comp. (sujeto) + Comp. (objeto)
Do you often write your boss letters?
I sold my cousin a new car.
Sujeto + verbo + Comp. (objeto) + TO / FOR / FROM + Comp. (sujeto)

Do you often write letters for your boss?
I sold a new car to my cousin.
My cousin bought a new car from me.
Posesivo of
This is a friend of mine.
Is Frank a cousin of yours?
Are those the cars of theirs?
Am I a classmate of hers?
Posesivo of:
Suj. + to be + objeto + of + Pro. Posesivo
Nota: solo es posible utilizarlo con verbo
to be para indicar posesin de algo.

-
I usually give flowers to her on an special date. I am the boyfriend of hers.

He sometimes does many favors for her sister.
Mr. Brown borrowed a car from them. He is an uncle of theirs.
His partner lends his notes to him every week.
Her grandmother is making some cookies for her granddaughter.
I told my teacher to take vacations. He is a good friend of ours.
Why dont you ask permission to your mother first?
The teacher explained the lessons to the students.
His father is going to buy some furniture from my father.
Page 77
Dont Forget:
La estructura de las oraciones con un verbo y dos complementos puede ser de

dos maneras distintas pero lo que se quiere expresar no cambia.
Las preposiciones que se pueden utilizar para completar estas oraciones son
for que indica para quien recae el resultado, to indica a quien se le hace la
accin y from que se utiliza para indicar de quien proviene el resultado.
El posesivo of solo es posible utilizarlo teniendo como verbo principal el
to be.
Despus de mencionar el posesivo of, se debe colocar un pronombre
posesivo para indicar de quien es.
Su equivalente en espaol sera cuando decimos un amigo de ella.
Lets read:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
What are you doing sister? I am bored!

I am doing nothing. Its a bored Sunday afternoon.
I agree. We should go out or something. What do you think?
No. Everybody is home setting the house for Christmas.
You are right. Well, lets do something here. What do you have in mind?
What about watching a movie or taking a nap?
I dont want to sleep. I have this magazine. Lets answer the survey it has.
Ok, those surveys are sometimes funny. Whats the first question?
Did you give lots of presents to your friends last Christmas?
Of course I did. I gave them some nice details.
Do you receive funny messages on your phone from an unknown number?
I sometimes do. I got on my phone a funny message yesterday.
Did a member of your family invite you to a party recently?
Yes, Daniel did. He is a cousin of ours, isnt he?
No, he isnt. He is just a close friend; anyway, do people often ask
questions to you while you are outside your house?
All the time. Tourist, homeless or friends always ask directions to me.
According to this and the answers you gave me, you are popular.
Is that it? I already knew that. Are these shoes of Frank?
Looking at the size of the shoes, they probably are.
Are the Millers on vacations with our parents?
Yes, they are in Florida. They are neighbors of theirs.
I guess they dont like the winter season. Its their lost, isnt it?
Yes, it is. Theres much to do on winter but not today.
Vocabulary:
Cousin Date To borrow To lend To ask Furniture To think Christmas
Details To detail Unknown Homeless To answer Size To guess
Page 78
UNIT FOUR
Preguntas indirectas. Too Enough.

Also Too.
Preguntas Directas e Indirectas

Preguntas Directas.
Preguntas Indirectas.
- Is it going to snow tomorrow?

- What are the neighbors names?
- I wonder if it is going to snow tomorrow.

- Can you tell me what the neighbors
names are?
- Do you know where Franks office is?
Yes, I know where it is.
No, I dont know where it is.
- Do you remember what time the meeting
was over?
- Did Angy tell you why he left so early?
- Where is Franks office?

- What time was the meeting over?
- Why did he leave so early?
- How is she going to get to the party?
- I wonder how she is going to get to the

party.
Also Too; Too Enough

He went to Paris last year.
I also went to Paris.
My uncle went to Paris too.
He is also French.
Please, less sugar in my coffee

Yes, it is too sweet.
Its sweet enough with no sugar.
Thats enough coffee for me.

-
Did you go to Spain last year? I didnt. I want to find out what Spain is like.
When did you go to the party? Id like to know who you met there.
I had enough money in my bank account to buy a car but its too late.
Did you know he is also a good student? My son is a good student too.
I wonder how he knit this sweater. Its gorgeous
Its enough of this behavior of yours. You are grounded.
Page 79
Dont Forget:
Las preguntas indirectas son ideas ms formales de preguntas normales que se

forman al colocar una pregunta educada delante de la oracin directa.
Como la primera parte de la idea indirecta ya identifica que es una pregunta,
el resto de la oracin debe estar estructurada como si fuese oracin afirmativa.
De acuerdo al punto anterior, si se tiene do does como auxiliar, se debe
eliminar de la pregunta y conjugar el verbo dependiendo del sujeto que se
mencion en la oracin. Ej. Does he Cook? - Do you know if he cooks? Esta
regla tambin aplica con el resto de los tiempos
Also Too expresan concordancia con la declaracin que se mencione. Al
utilizarlos, expresa que usted tambin es o realiza la accin descrita. Also se
coloca antes del verbo de accin pero despus del verbo to be. Too
siempre se colocar al final de la oracin.
Too enough son para cantidades. Too expresa mucho de algo y siempre
se coloca antes de un adjetivo. Enough expresa suficiente de algo y se
coloca antes de un sustantivo pero despus de un adjetivo.
Lets read:
Frank:
Eduard:
Frank:
Eduard:
Frank:
Eduard:
Frank:
Eduard:
Frank:
Eduard:
Frank:
Eduard:
Frank:
Eduard:
Frank:
Eduard:
Frank:
Hey dude! That was a really annoying class. Dont you think?
No, it wasnt. It was very helpful for me. I cant imagine why you say that.
It was also helpful for me but it didnt take away the boring part.
It doesnt matter. Would it be possible for the teacher to give us private
classes? I cant remember whether he said he had Saturday or Sundays off.
It would be nice. The more knowledge for us, the better it is. He has this
Saturday off. Is he giving us math and history too?
Yes, he will teach us everything to get us ready for the exam next week.
Nice but I am hungry. Lets stop to eat something.
I am hungry too. Would you like to have pizza or pasta?
I want some pasta. Lets go to the Italian place and get a takeout, I have to
feed my little brother today.
Sure, lets go. Did you build the extra room in your house?
I finished it last week. I need a favor from you. I was wondering whether or
not you could take care of my little brother today because I have a date.
Sure, I will take care of him. Have a nice date.
Did the flowers of your moms garden thrive?
Yes, they did. They are huge.
Is there any chance you could cut four so I could give them to my date?
You are asking too much now. Two flowers is enough ok. Lets go home.
Thanks! I owe you one.
Vocabulary:
To snow To meet To wonder To remember To be over To leave Sweet
Account To knit To behave Behavior To be grounded To annoy To thrive
To be helpful To take away Knowledge To stop Takeout To build - Huge
Page 80
UNIT FIVE
Expresin impersonal con It.
Pay vs Pay for.
Either - Neither - Both
Expresin impersonal con It

Its going to snow.
Its raining.
It is hot/cold.
Its sunny/cloudy/foggy
El It no se traduce por ser impersonal,

se coloca para funcionar como sujeto de
la oracin.
Pay vs Pay for

Pay a service
We pay the grocery bill.
We pay the rent.
We pay tuition.
We pay the lawyer.
Pay
Pay for
We pay for groceries.

We pay for a house.
We pay for medicine.
We pay for train tickets.
Pay for an item
Neither Either - Both

I didnt see that movie. Neither did I / me neither
You can take either car you like.
Neither of them are good movies.
Either of them are good movies.
He wasnt a small boy. She wasnt either.
Can either Frank or Angy do it?
I like both cars. They both are comfortable.
Both of them are great places to go on vacations.
Neither:
Oraciones negativas.
Either:
Oraciones positivas y
negativas.
Preguntas.
Both:
Oraciones afirmativas.
Preguntas.

-
Its too cold. I cant go to the insurance office to pay this month.
He wont pay for his shoes because it was a gift from his father.
Can I drink either coffee or tea? Im sorry. We have neither of them available.
Its a beautiful day. Its sunny and warm. I dont like it, do you? Neither do I.
Did you boys pay for those candies? No, sorry mom. Neither did I. Run!
Would you like to learn either English or French? I like both of them.
Page 81
Dont Forget:
En las oraciones impersonales siempre debe aparecer un pronombre que haga

la funcin de sujeto, este ser it. Usualmente se utilizan para decir cmo
est el clima y para decir la hora.
Pay se utiliza para pagar un servicio y pay for para pagar por un articulo.
Neither indica concordancia en una oracin negativa, es decir, su
equivalente seria yo tampoco o ni yo. Se utiliza en oraciones negativas y
por ser una negacin por s mismo, no se debe colocar un auxiliar negado.
Me neither es correcto coloquialmente mas no gramaticalmente.
Either indica variedad al colocarlo antes de 2 o ms sujetos o cosas. Se
utiliza en oraciones positivas o preguntas.
Both expresa que ambas se toman en cuenta.
Lets read:
Frank:
Eduard:
Frank:
Eduard:
Frank:
Eduard:
Frank:
Eduard:
Frank:
Eduard:
Frank:
Eduard:
Frank:
Eduard:
Frank:
Eduard:
Frank:
How was your last trimester at the university?

Its was good. I approved all my subjects but I didnt do social work.
The same happened to me. I didnt do it either because I was too busy.
I didnt do it because I was too lazy. Did you pay this month tuition?
Yes, I did about two weeks ago. Will you raise your hand to participate
next class? You are sometimes too shy and you dont practice enough.
Neither do half the class. Its because of the teacher. He scares us.
I cant refuse that but you have to get over it and show what you know,
otherwise, you are going to flunk the subject.
Yes, I know. I will try to do my best. Thanks for your support Frank.
Dont mention it. Were friends. Who do you dwell with at the moment?
Im living with two cousins now. I was looking for a house to rent but we
just found an apartment.
I didnt find a good place to stay when I was seeking for one either.
Whats that smell? Lets blow it away!
I think its coming from that basket of rot fruit. Well have to throw it away
and light up an aromatic candle to disappear the smell.
That seems to work. Lets do it fast because I cant stand the smell.
Its really strong and its scattered all over the place. Itll go away in about
half an hour. I already lit up the candle.
Thanks. Talk to you later because Im going to take a shower.
Sure, I am going home too. I hope that I dont have the smell on me.
Vocabulary:
Cloudy - Foggy - Tuition - Lawyer - Insurance - To be available - Gift - To show
To approve - To happen - To be busy - To be lazy - To pay - To raise To seem
To scare - To be shy - To refuse - To get over - To flunk - To try - To support
To mention - To dwell - To book - To seek - To smell - To blow - To throw
Page 82
UNIT SIX
Cuantificadores. Could Be good at

A few
Many
Some / Any
Contables
Cuantificadores
No Contables
A lot of
A little
Much
Some / Any
Could Be good at (Past Ability)

- When I was a child, I could ride a bike
very fast for a long time.
- My sister couldnt speak French at all
six months ago.
- My friend and I couldnt steal a
chocolate bar because we were scared.
- I was good at riding bikes very fast

for a long time when I was a child.
- My sister wasnt good at speaking
French six months ago.
- My friend and I werent good at
stealing a chocolate bar.

- Neither Frank nor Angy went to school today.
- I like neither coffee nor tea, but Susie likes either of them.
- Id like to have either a boat or a car for my birthday gift.
- Rossy did neither her chores nor her homework.

-
My fellow workers usually have a few snacks for lunch.

When we were younger, we were pretty good at dancing.
Mario could neither run nor swim because of his laziness.
That guy is not either eating or showering. He seems homeless.
Frank couldnt even tear up a piece of paper when he was sick.
I will be good at speaking English in a few months.
Page 83
Dont Forget:
Se utiliza any para preguntas y respuestas negativas. Se utiliza a lot of

para expresar grandes cantidades de objetos contables e incontables.
En esta unidad, se muestra could be good at como auxiliares para
habilidades que se podan hacer en el pasado.
Could siempre va seguido de un verbo en forma simple, mientras que be
good at va seguido de un verbo con ing. Este por ser un verbo se puede
utilizar en cualquier tiempo al conjugarlo de la manera adecuada.
Could expresa que podas hacer algo y be good at que eres bueno
haciendo algo.
Neither nor se utiliza para expresar que ni lo primero ni lo segundo que se
menciona se comporta de cierta manera o ninguna de las dos son ciertas. Este
de por s es una negacin por lo que no se niega la oracin con algn auxiliar.
Either or expresa que de dos opciones mencionadas, solo una se elige o
solo una es cierta.
Lets read:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
What are you doing sister? How was your first day of school this year?
It was nice. I missed my friends but I saw them earlier today.
Did they send you a lot of homework?
They neither sent homework to us nor gave us classes.
What did you do during your time at the university today?
We just hung out around the place and talk about our vacations.
Could somebody travel abroad this Christmas?
Two friends of mine did. They went to Europe but neither of them brought
me something even though I asked them.
Shame on them. They didnt remember you. Are you going to cook dinner
or set the table and clean today?
Im going to neither cook nor clean sister. Im joyless because I didnt get
anything from Europe.
You either choose something to do or you dont eat!
Id prefer to do a little cooking. Is that ok?
Yes, I prefer to clean. Do you remember when we made ice creams?
I certainly do. We were good at making them and eating them, but I think
they were so tasty and creamy because of the machine we used.
Of course thats why or did you really think that we knew how to cook?
Vocabulary:
To ride To steal Bike To speak To be scared Chores Fellow To seem
To shower Laziness To dance To tear up To miss To send To hang out
To travel Abroad Shame on somebody To bring To choose - joyless
Page 84
UNIT SEVEN
Still, not anymore, ever, never, until
Still
Do you still behave well?
Not anymore
She cant kneel anymore.
Ever
I wont ever trust that guy.
Never
I will never trust that guy.
Until
Frank is staying here until two.
Still Todava;
Not anymore No ms;
Ever En cualquier momento (preguntas y negacin)
Never Nunca (oracin afirmativa)
Until Hasta

-
Eduard left six hours ago but he is still out.

Rosy wont play that instrument anymore and she will never practice.
Did you ever pay him back? I will never do it until he says hes sorry.
Are you still playing tennis? I thought you didnt play anymore.
Did Eduard hit you? Does it still hurt? Id never talk to him again.
Do you still live where you did five years ago? I dont anymore.
Will Susie spread all the designer clothes around the store?
Dont ever let me see you smoking again.
I wont be back home until your friends are out of there.
Does your child swing when hes at the park or he doesnt like it anymore?
Does Susies friends baby still creep or he is strong enough to walk?
Page 85
Dont Forget:
Still pregunta si todava se realiza una accin. Su ubicacin en la oracin es

antes del verbo de accin y despus del to be. El verbo se conjuga de
acuerdo al caso.
Not anymore expresa que una accin no se hace ms. En la oracin tiene
que estar presente el auxiliar acorde en su forma negada y anymore al final
de la oracin.
Ever se utiliza para hacer preguntas y en oraciones negativas. Usualmente
se responde a las preguntas con adverbios de frecuencia.
Never es una negacin por s mismo y solo se permite una por oracin.
Until expresa un lmite o una condicin, dependiendo de la forma en que se
utilice.
Lets read:
Frank:
Daniel:
Frank:
Daniel:
Frank:
Daniel:
Frank:
Daniel:
Frank:
Daniel:
Frank:
Daniel:
Frank:
Daniel:
Frank:
Daniel:
Frank:
Daniel:
Frank:
So, tell me dude. Did you ever smoke when you were a teenager?
Yes, I did but I dont anymore. I did it until I was fifteen.
Dont you think it was a mistake? Do you ever regret about it?
I do think it was a mistake now but I dont regret though.
Its good that you dont smoke now because youre getting older.
Dont remind me that. It seems like yesterday when I was in high school.
I will never forget that period of my life. I have such nice memories.
What time are you going back home anyway?
Not until Angy calls me up because I need to know where she is.
Why is that? Are you heading somewhere in the evening?
I still dont know but I think well go to the circus.
I wont ever go there again. Im afraid of clowns since I was a child.
Well, thats nice because I didnt want you to come.
Thats cruel man. Dont ever say that again.
You know Im kidding. I wont do it until you say something dumb like
that again.
Whatever dude! Do you still know how to leap the rope?
Yes, I know but I dont do it anymore. I think thats for kids.
Thats why youre gaining some extra weight. You dont make exercise
anymore. You have to take care of yourself.
You got a point there. Lets go running every day at six oclock.
Vocabulary:
To leave To play To pay To think To hit To be hurt To spread
To swing To creep To smoke To regret To remind To remember
To forget To call To head Clown Dumb To leap To gain - Weight
Page 86
UNIT EIGHT
Parts of the body.

Parts of the Body
The Body
El Cuerpo
- Face: rostro
- Mouth: boca
- Chin: barbilla
- Neck: cuello
- Shoulder: hombro
- Arm: brazo
- Upper arm: antebrazo
- Elbow: codo
- Fore arm: antebrazo
- Back: espalda
- Chest: pecho (M)

- Breast: pecho (F)
- Waist: cintura
-Abdomen: abdomen
- Buttocks: nalgas
- Hip: cadera
- Leg: pierna
- Thigh: muslo
- Knee: rodilla
- Calf: pantorrilla
The Hand
La Mano
- Wrist: mueca
- Knuckle: nudillo
- Fingernail: ua
- Thumb: dedo gordo
- Index finger: ndice
- Middle finger: medio

- Ring finger: anular
- Little finger: meique
- Palm: palma
The Head
La Cabeza
- Hair: cabello
- Forehead: frente
- Sideburn: patilla
- Ear: odo, oreja
- Cheek: mejilla
- Nose: nariz
- Nostril: fosa nasal
- Jaw: quijada
- Beard: barba
- Mustache: bigote
- Tongue: lengua
- Tooth: diente
- Teeth: dientes
- Lip: labio
The Eye
El Ojo
- Eyebrow: ceja
- Eyelid: parpado
- Eyelash: pestaa
- Iris: iris
- Pupil: pupila
- Ankle: tobillo
- Heel: taln
- Sole: planta
- Toe: dedo
- Belly Bottom: ombligo
Page 87
Always Remember:

I do my homework by myself. You do your homework alone.

He does his homework himself. She does her homework herself. It bites itself.
You do your homework yourselves. They do their homework themselves.
Frank wants you to go to the store to buy him some groceries.
My friend is writing a protest email to her bank because they let her down.
I am giving Susie a ride to work because she is late.
He is taking French lesson from a guy on YouTube.
Eduard, are these glasses of yours?
Its my pleasure to introduce you to a friend of mine.
Are you able to let me know when the line move forward?
Is there any chance you drive me to the concert tonight?
I cant go out right now because I am too busy.
Are you really a teacher? I am also a teacher, what a coincidence!
I had a few drinks before I came here. Angy did too, so she needs a restroom.
Does she eat as little as I remember? She doesnt anymore.
Her boyfriend says he will never parachute because its too dangerous.
Will Rossy ever wake up early on vacations?
Lets Practice:
Which of the following words has a different sound? Circle the correct
answer.
1.
alone
phone
shown
thrown
town
2.
clear
bear
beer
dear
fear
3.
goes
chose
lose
shows
toes
4.
knew
grew
sew
threw
through
5.
made
afraid
paid
played
said
6.
route
boot
foot
shoot
suit
7.
shoes
choose
does
lose
news
8.
there
care
hair
here
wear
9.
throw
go
know
toe
too
10.
weight
great
height
late
straight
11.
worse
horse
nurse
purse
reverse
12.
son
fun
on
sun
won
Page 88
UNIT NINE
Would
Would para pasado. Used to get

used to be used to be supposed to
- When I was a kid, I would always go biking.

- My sister would always feed the dogs five years ago.
- He wouldnt go into the water by himself at age of six.
Would used to indican acciones
hechas repetidamente en el pasado.
Used to
Sola
- I used to forget all the homework that I had.

- She used to buy expensive clothes four years ago.
- Did Frank use to go diving on weekends?
- Eduard didnt use to smoke that many cigarettes last year.
Get used to Acostumbrarse

- He got used to being alone since he was a child because his parents worked a lot.
- I am getting used to traveling that far every day.
Be used to Estar acostumbrado

- Are you used to waking up late on weekends?
- Frank seldom washes his car, so he will never be used to it.
Be supposed to
- Arent you supposed to be working right now? (present)
- Susie was supposed to go to work yesterday, but she didnt. (past)
- Frank is supposed to sweep the floor next week, isnt he? (future)

-
When he got older, he would never do his homework.

Did Rossy use to breed puppies when she was ten years old? Yes, she used to.
I will never get used to driving in cosmopolitan cities.
Eduard was supposed to come but he is often used to missing appointments.
Page 89
Dont Forget:
El auxiliar would en esta leccin se utiliza para indicar acciones realizadas

en el pasado repetidamente pero no se hacen ms en el presente. El auxiliar no
cambia con los distintos pronombres y el verbo queda en forma simple.
Used to y would tienen significados similares, por lo que se pueden
suplantar el uno con el otro.
Used to no cambia con los distintos pronombres y el verbo que le sigue
queda en infinitivo.
Get used to significa acostumbrarse, el verbo get se debe conjugar de
acuerdo al tiempo en el cual se habla y debe estar seguido del verbo con ing
Be used to significa estar acostumbrado, de igual manera, el verbo be se
debe conjugar de acuerdo al sujeto y tiempo utilizado, debe estar seguido del
verbo con ing.
Be supposed to indica alguna obligacin o promesa que debera ser
cumplida pero probablemente no se haga. El verbo be solo se puede
conjugar en presente y pasado.
Lets read:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Its nice talking to you Angy. So, tell me! How was your childhood?
Its nice talking to you too. Youre a good listener. I have very nice
memories of my childhood. I would always ride my pink bike everywhere.
Every little girl has a pink bike when they were young. What else did you
use to do? Did you use to bite your dad on the shoulders?
I would always bite him, not only on the shoulders, but also on his belly.
I used to dig in my backyard to seek for a treasure, but I never found it. Im
used to working for my money now. Its easier.
That makes sense. People are used to change over time. I wouldnt spend a
complete afternoon working on my laptop when I was ten years old.
You told me that you had a new boss two weeks ago. How is he? Are you
still getting used to him?
My co-workers and I are already used to him. He is very understanding and
he listens to our opinions, not like our last boss.
Are you supposed to be using your laptop now because I am not done yet?
I was supposed to use it two hours ago, but not now. Dont worry.
Did you use to use this same notebook a year ago?
No, I didnt. Technology improves too fast to have the same laptop for a
year, dont you think?
Vocabulary:
To go biking To feed To sweep To wake up To breed Cosmopolitan
Appointment Childhood To bite To dig To seek To change To improve
Page 90
UNIT TEN
Be going to para futuro y para pasado

irreal.
Be going to para Futuro

I am going to blow the candles of my birthday cake after I make my wish.
He
She
It
is going to dream about not having to eat ice cream again.
We
You
They
are going to make a lot of exercise to lose 20 pounds in five weeks.
Be going to para Pasado Irreal

I was going to blow the candles of my cake after I made my wish but I forgot.
He
She
It
was going to lend money but he remembered he was broke.
We
You
They
were going to make a lot of exercise to lose weight but we were lazy.

-
I was going to leave before you showed up but I didnt have enough time.
I was going to dwell on dreams and forget about love because of my sadness.
Were your siblings going to help you with your chores before they left?
Frank wasnt going to come to the party because of a headache but here he is.
Angy is going to come with me this afternoon to visit my grandparents.
What were you going to do yesterday when your friends went to your place?
Rossy and Eduard were going to quit their jobs, werent they?
Page 91
Dont Forget:
Be going to expresa tanto futuro simple como pasado irreal dependiendo de

cmo se conjugue el verbo be.
S conjugamos el verbo be en presente (am is are), la oracin expresa
futuro, s lo conjugamos en pasado (was were), expresamos pasado irreal.
Be going to para pasado irreal nos deja saber que se iba realizar una accin
pero a la final no se hizo por cualquier motivo.
La diferencia entre futuro con will y futuro con be going to es que el
primero expresa un futuro lejano, deseos, ideas, predicciones segn tu punto
de vista u opiniones, mientras que be going to expresa un futuro cercano o
predicciones con base en lo que est pasando.
Lets read:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Indeed. Technology is the fastest growing business nowadays.

Are you going to get a better Pc now that you agree with me?
Im going to take a look at what retailers are offering but I doubt I will buy
one soon because Im happy with what I have.
Susie was going to withdraw some money to buy one yesterday but the
cash machine didnt work.
Thats too bad. She should try again today, shouldnt she?
She already did but the store is closed today. Its Sunday, remember?
Shell have to wait then. Were you and your sister going to hide Rossys
shoes to play with her at Eduards party?
Yes, we were but we didnt. Where were you going to go after that party?
I wasnt going anywhere. I said that in case the party was boring.
Well thought but it was great. By the way, are you going on vacations with
us to the mountains? Well go camping.
Id love to go. I need a break from my daily life. When are we going?
Susie and I think that in about three weeks we should start our trip.
That seems acceptable to me. Im excited about it. Werent you going to
the mountains last year or am I wrong?
You arent wrong. We couldnt go because we were short in cash. We had
to invest in something that wasnt included in the plans.
Im sure that investment will pay off, hopefully.
Im glad to let you know that it did. It paid off really well.
Vocabulary:
To blow - Candles - Cake - To wish - To dream - To remember - To lose
To leave - To show up - To dwell - Sadness - Sibling - Chores - To quit Meeting
Business Retailer Wholesaler To offer To start To invest To pay off
Page 92
SPECIAL PRACTICE
Find and mark all the body part words listed bellow in the puzzle.
Bank of words:
Arm
Hand
Nose
Bladder
Head
Skin
Bone
Heart
Spine
Brain
Kidney
Toe
Ears
Leg
Tongue
Eyes
Liver
Veins
Foot
Lungs
Finger
Muscles
Page 93
Find and mark the words listed bellow in the puzzle.
Bank of words:
Acute
Canny
Nimble
Adept
Clever
Precocious
Advanced
Crafty
Quick-witted
Agile
Discerning
Resourceful
Alert
Sassy
Apt
Einstein
Sharp
Astute
Genius
Shrewd
Aware
Ingenious
Whiz kid
Brainy
Intelligent
Wide-awake
Bright
Inventive
Wise
Brilliant
Keen
Knowing
Page 94
UNIT ELEVEN
Clusulas de Tiempo
Clusula de Tiempo.
Condicionales Tipo A y B.
When he wakes up, he usually brushes his teeth first.

After I eat my dinner, Im going to have desert.
She calls him as soon as he arrives home.
Before we leave, Id like to go to the restroom.
Condicional Tipo A
If I get up late, I miss the bus to my university.
Unless I pay the internet bill, my provider suspends the service.
Her father worries if she isnt home by seven oclock.
As long as my friend is here, we have dinner in the evening.
Conditional clause (present), result clause (present)
Condicional Tipo B
In case it rains, I will come back earlier.
He will arrive late to work unless he hurries up.
Whatever happens tonight, I will go to work tomorrow.
I will buy a car if I get the money.
Conditional clause (present), result clause (future)

-
If the sun arises early tomorrow, we will go to the beach.

Unless the dog bites you, he stays with us.
That is the car we need except that the price is a little high.
As soon as Angy gets her raise, she will go shopping.
You have to take care of your pet. If you don't feed it, it will past away.
We have to leave before its too late. If we don't, we will get caught.
Wherever you go next year, you will always count on me.
If my father doesn't go to work, I get the car all day.
If you hide your aunts keys, she will get angry.
Page 95
Dont Forget:
Un condicional est formado por dos oraciones, un condicional y un resultado.

Si se comienza la oracin con el condicional, est debe estar separada del
resultado por una coma, s no, la coma no se coloca.
Las clusulas de tiempo indican dos acciones conectadas por una relacin
directa en diferentes periodos de tiempo.
Los condicionales tipo A son situaciones que son siempre verdaderas si algo
pasa y usualmente pueden ser reemplazadas por la clusula de tiempo when.
Los condicionales tipo B indican una situacin real o posible y toma lugar
cuando la condicin se cumple.
El condicional unless es sinnimo de ifnot, es decir, unless he hurries
up tambin podra ser escrito if he doesnt hurry up.
Lets read:
Rossy:
Angy:
Rossy:
Angy:
Rossy:
Angy:
Rossy:
Angy:
Eduard:
Angy:
Eduard:
Angy:
Eduard:
Angy:
Eduard:
Are you going out Angy? You look very pretty!

Yes, I am. Im going to the store. Do you think I should take my umbrella?
If the sky is dark, you should take it with you because you would mess up
your hair if you got wet.
It seems like its going to rain, so I will take my umbrella. If you tell me
what you need, I could buy it for you at the store.
What store are you going to?
Im going to the super-market. Do you need anything from there?
No, I dont. Unless you go to the mall, I dont need anything. When you go
there, let me know but thanks anyway.
Im leaving then. See you in a couple hours.
What a coincidence. What are you doing here?
Im buying some things I need but, if there are no discounts available, I
wont get all I planned.
Everything is really expensive, isnt it? If I dont get promoted soon, I will
have to learn to live within my means.
I understand you. What are you doing after youre done here?
It depends on the time. If I finish what Im doing before six, I will go to a
friends house, if I dont, Im going home. Why do you ask?
I asked you because I wanted to know if you could give me a ride home.
No problem. Ill take you there. If there is too much traffic, Ill drop you
off on the bus stop.
Vocabulary:
3
To wake up To get up - Desert To dessert To suspend Bill To arrive

To arise To raise To bite To get a raise To past away To hide
To get promoted - To live within your means To give a ride To drop off
=
Page 96
UNIT TWELVE
Perfect Tense. Ever never

Already yet For since
Present Perfect Tense

I have spoken to our teacher three times.
Hes already walked ten miles by now.
Has she ever been to Canada before?
Havent you done your homework yet?
Weve never hurt our pet, havent we?
He has given her many gifts during the year.
Indica que una accin ha

comenzado en el pasado y
la misma o su consecuencia
todava continua en el
presente.
Suj. + Aux. (have - has - had) + Verb. (participio) + Comp.
Past Perfect Tense

I had spoken to our teacher before you did.
Hed walked twenty miles when you left.
She had already been to Canada three times.
Had you done your homework before you ate?
She hadnt given you any gift before you called.
Indica que una accin

comenz y termin en el
pasado antes que otra
accin iniciara, tambin en
el pasado.
For - Since
Ive lived in the US for ten years.
Hes been here since he was a child.
Weve kept that car for eight years.
Weve kept that car since 2001.
Shes slept for ten hours.
Se utiliza comnmente en el
presente perfecto. For
indica una duracin de
tiempo mientras que since
indica la fecha de inicio de la
accin.

-
Shes already seen that movie. We should do something else.

Ive lost my keys and I havent found them yet. Im going to be late.
It has never bitten anybody yet. Don't annoy it or do you want to be the first?
My friends have fallen of their bikes and theyve broken some bones.
Frank had already failed his driving test when you approved yours.
Nobody has ever visited him since he insulted that girl so badly.
Page 97
Dont Forget:
El presente perfecto se usa para decir que una accin pas en un tiempo
inespecfico en el pasado.
Usualmente se utiliza el presente perfecto para hablar de experiencia, cambio
en el tiempo, logros, acciones sin terminar y una accin realizada en
diferentes momentos.
El pasado perfecto indica que la accin mencionada pas primero, es decir,
aun ms al pasado que otras acciones mencionadas en pasado simple.
Usualmente se utiliza el pasado perfecto para reportar acciones que
ocasionaron un cierto orden de situaciones en un pasado reciente.
Already nos hace saber que algo ya paso y yet que algo todava no ha
pasado. Tambin se pueden utilizar en presente y pasado simple.
For y since comnmente se utiliza con presente perfecto pero tambin es
correcto en otros tiempos. El primero indica una duracin de tiempo mientras
que el segundo indica la fecha de inicio de la accin.
Lets read:
Frank:
How have you been Eduard? What have you done lately?
Eduard: Ive been fine. What about you? I havent done a lot because Ive been on
vacation. Ill be back to work next week.
Frank:
Have you enjoyed your vacations? I have had many gigs to make some
extra money. I need to increase my profit. Ive been pretty busy.
Eduard: Yes, Ive enjoyed them. Do you like the extra jobs? I think its always
good to have plenty of work because it means plenty of money.
Frank:
I agree. Had you voted for the next Carnival queen before you went on
vacation last year? Im leaving next week and I wont be able to vote.
Eduard: Yes, I had. I voted for the girl who won. You shouldnt leave without
voting because that is one of the few inalienable rights a person has.
Frank:
I know that but Ive already booked my flight ticket. Im going to be away
for two weeks. I havent made my luggage yet.
Eduard: I hope you have a great vacation and be aware of how much booze you
drink. If you encounter any problems, you can always call me so I could
laugh for a while. I havent worked since last month.
Frank:
Thanks, youre a really good friend. Im on my way out now. Take care!
Eduard: I was just kidding. Im leaving too. Rosy has just got to where we agreed to
meet. I had invited her out before I saw you today. See you later.
Vocabulary:
3
To hurt To live To speak To keep To lose To bite To fail To insult

To visit To approve To break Lately To enjoy Gig To increase Profit
To laugh Inalienable To book Luggage To be aware To encounter
Page 98
UNIT THIRTEEN
Simple Past vs Present Perfect.

Wh- questions with linking verbs.
Simple Past vs Present Perfect

Simple Past
- El periodo de tiempo termin.
.) I worked three days last week.
Present Perfect
- El periodo de tiempo no ha terminado
.) Ive worked three days this week.
- Noticias antiguas.
.) Eduard fell off the stairs last year.
- Noticias recientes.
.) Eduard has fallen off the stairs again.
- Momentos especficos.
.) I saw my girlfriend one hour ago.
- Momentos inespecficos.
.) Ive seen my girlfriend twice today.
- Acciones terminadas con For y Since

.) She slept for ten hours (Ya despert)
- Acciones sin terminar con For y Since

.) She has slept for ten hours (Duerme)
Wh- questions with linking verbs

- She has been in Canada for two years.
Why did she go there?
Because she wanted to study abroad.
- Angys been a university student.

When did she become one?
Shes been one for two years.
- Ive had this car since I graduated.

When did you buy your car?
I bought it when I finished high school.
- Susies known them since 2001.

How did they meet?
They met on a cruise on vacation.

-
Frank went to the U.S. last year. Hes gone there four times during his life.
My friend flunked math last semester and he has flunked it again this one.
I poked my dog last week. Ive poked it again today and it has bitten me.
Hes taught English since 2008 but hed studied it for two years before he did.
When did your niece get sick? Shes been sick for a complete week with flu.
Are your parents still married? Yes, theyve got married fifteen years ago.
Does your boss still live downtown? Hes lived there all his life.
Do your siblings mock you? Theyve mocked me since they were born.
Page 99
Dont Forget:
El pasado simple se utiliza para acciones ya terminadas, noticias antiguas y

momentos especficos en el pasado, en cambio, con el presente perfecto el
periodo de tiempo aun no termina, las noticias son recientes y los momentos
inespecficos, por lo que solo se puede mencionar adverbios de frecuencia.
La funcin de los linking verbs es de pasar una oracin que est en tiempo
perfecto a pregunta en pasado simple, estos pueden ser cualquier verbo que
relacione la accin en tiempo perfecto con la pregunta en pasado simple.
En esta unidad, se presentan a los linking verbs como conectivos de tiempo,
pero en una sola oracin, estos exponen la relacin del sujeto con el
complemento y los utilizamos seguido sin darnos cuenta.
For expresa el periodo de tiempo y Since la fecha de inicio de la accin.
Lets read:
Eduard: Hello lady. I could finally go out with you. Ive lost count of how many
times Ive invited you out. I didnt think you liked me.
Rosy:
Take it easy Eduard. You know Ive been really busy with work, so its
almost impossible for me to have some spare time.
Eduard: Youre right. Youre always working, tackling problems at work.
Rosy:
I sometimes feel like my co-workers wouldnt know what to do if I dont
show up one day; anyway, I havent come here to continue speaking about
work. How was your day?
Eduard: Youre an important person inside the company, thats great! My day has
been nice. Ive just finished talking with Frank.
Rosy:
How is he? I havent seen him for a long time.
Eduard: He will be on vacations next week and hes going away.
Rosy:
Good for him. What about your coin collection? Do you still have them?
Eduard: Yes, I do. Ive gathered my collection after a long period of time, so I
wouldnt even think about selling them to anybody.
Rosy:
Why did you begin to collect coins? What do you like about them?
Eduard: Ive always been attracted to money history. I feel that having coins from
around the world makes me experience their development.
Rosy:
Thats a good reason to have the collection. Make it bigger.
Eduard: Thanks. Did you explain your co-workers what to do while you were out?
Rosy:
Of course I did, otherwise, the company would go bankrupt. Ive depicted
them every step.
Eduard: Youre a good manager. Lets go into the movie theatre now.
Vocabulary:
3
To fall To become To meet To flunk To poke Flu To be married

To get married To mock Spare time To tackle a problem To collect
To gather To begin To attract Development Bankrupt To depict
Page 100
UNIT FOURTEEN
Tiempo perfecto en progresivo presente.

How long How long ago.
Tiempo Perfecto en Progresivo

I have been learning English for two months.
He has been working with her since last year.
You have been sobbing all day for him.
She hadn't been shouting at you before that.
Have they been measuring the baseball field?
Indica
acciones
que
comenzaron en el pasado
y continan en el presente
de manera progresiva.
Suj. + aux (have has) + been + Verbo (ing) + comp.
How long How long ago

How long
How long ago
How long did you stay in Chicago?

- I stayed there for seven months.
How long ago did you go to Chicago?

- I went there one year ago.
How long has she kept my phone?

- Shes had it since you left.
How long ago did she take my phone?

- She took it after you left.
How long have they been trying to

make that kite fly?
- Theyve been trying to make it fly for
half an hour.
How long ago did they begin to make

that kite fly?
- They began to try half an hour ago.
How long is Frank going to be in town?

- Hes going to be here for two weeks.
How long ago did he arrive to town?

- He arrived two days ago.

-
I have been cooking all day because my family is coming tonight.

How long ago did you quit your job? I quit a week ago. Ive been worried.
She has been hearing our conversation through the door all the time.
How long has he been fixing his car? Hes been working on it all morning.
Weve been thinking of phoning them all day but we don't have their number.
Page 101
Dont Forget:
El tiempo perfecto progresivo indica acciones que comenzaron en el pasado y

que todava continan en el presente en forma progresiva, es decir, que la
accin se est realizando al momento que se dice.
El perfecto continuo tambin expresa una accin que el emisor ha querido
hacer por un tiempo.
La duracin del tiempo progresivo se puede medir con el uso de how long y
for - since.
How long nos da la duracin de tiempo en el cual se realiz una accin.
How long ago nos da la duracin de tiempo que ha pasado desde que alguna
accin o situacin dada termin.
Lets read:
Eduard: I have been trying to see this movie for a long time. Im glad because Im
watching it with you tonight.
Rosy:
Its supposed to be a great movie according to the critics.
Eduard: Yes, Ive heard really good comments about it. I hope it wont let us down.
Rosy:
So do I. How long have you been coming to this movie theatre?
Eduard: Ive been coming here all my life. Its my favorite. How long ago did you
come here?
Rosy:
I havent seen a movie here for a year. Its been such a long time.
Eduard: Youve been working too much lately, that explains the long absence.
Rosy:
Youre right. I need to take a break. How long do you think this movie is
going to last? Ive eaten a lot of popcorns and I think theyre not enough.
Eduard: I think a couple hours. Dont worry about popcorns, well have refills.
Rosy:
Have you been practicing table tennis recently? I know you love it.
Eduard: No, I havent because Ive been struggling with a wrist pain.
Rosy:
What happened to your wrist? Is everything ok?
Eduard: Its alright. I played too much and Im not able to move it for a week now.
Im on the mend because I need it to be great for an upcoming tournament.
Rosy:
Well, it seems you need to take a break too. How long ago did you play?
Eduard: I played table tennis five days ago. Its been almost a week, so Im very
eager to play again when I heal completely.
Rosy:
Put ice on it. A doctor once told me that I had to do it whenever I bruised
any part of my body. Lets be quiet, the movie is about to begin.
Eduard: I do it all the time. The movie has begun. Turn off your phone.
Vocabulary:
3
To sob To shout To measure Field To try To quit To hear To fix

To phone To be glad To let someone down Absence To struggle Wrist
To be on the mend To mend To heal To be eager To bruise
Page 102
UNIT FIFTEEN
Concordancia de tiempos verbales.

Restrictive and non-restrictive Clauses.
Concordancia de tiempos verbales

I believe it is going to rain.
I believed it was going to rain.
He says he will work until midnight.
He said he would work until midnight.
She thinks she can climb the Everest.
She thought she could climb the Everest.
Cuando el verbo principal de

una oracin est en tiempo
pasado, todos los dems
verbos
deben
hacer
referencia al pasado. Esto es
muy
utilizado
en
el
Reported Speech.
Restrictive and non-restrictive Clauses

Restrictive
Non-restrictive
- The girl who is talking is very pretty.

- The secretary whom I asked out is tall.
- The museum which/that has a T-Rex is
located in Chicago.
- That house that belongs to the Smith is
gorgeous.
- Eduard built the house I was raised in.
- Rosy, who is talking, is very pretty.

- Danni, who is a secretary, is tall.
- The Field Museum, which has a T-Rex,
is located in Chicago.
- Their house, which belongs to the
Smiths, is gorgeous.
- My house, which I was raised in, was
very big.

-
When I was at her house, she said that she would come to mine next week.
Do you know the gal who studied with me yesterday?
Angy, whom I gave a watch on San Valentines day, is beautiful.
Artists who know how to stay on top will earn a lot of money.
The place I told you about is unforgettable because it reminded me my town.
She told me she would like to sew a dress. She wants to be a designer.
Eduard, who isnt able to spend a day without smoking, can run twenty miles.
Page 103
Dont Forget:
La concordancia de tiempos verbales se refiere al orden en el tiempo de una

oracin. Es usado en todas las estructuras y tiempos verbales del idioma,
usualmente, se debe tener en cuenta cuando se trabaja con Reported Speech.
Las clausulas se utilizan para dar ms informacin de un sujeto en una misma
oracin.
Las Restrictive Clauses nos seala de quien estamos hablando mediante la
informacin extra que nos provee del sujeto. Al no estar separada por comas,
la entonacin al momento de leerla es una sola.
Las Non-restrictive Clauses nos provee informacin extra del sujeto del que
se habla, el cual ya conocemos, todo en una misma oracin. Al estar separada
por comas, tiene tres pausas al momento de leerla, antes, durante y despus de
las comas.
Lets read:
Eduard: The movie has finally ended. It has been one of the longest Ive ever seen.
Rosy:
I agree with you, but it has also been one of the best. The critics were right
when they said all those good comments about it.
Eduard: Im glad you liked it. Do you remember the girl the protagonist killed at the
end of the movie? I always knew she wasnt going to last long.
Rosy:
The main character, who was really cute, was pretty lonely and disturbed.
Eduard: Thats the reason he wanted to see everyone die. He was helpless.
Rosy:
The house where the movie took place looked a lot like the house my
grandmother was born in. It was very creepy and scary.
Eduard: Good you didnt live there. Do you want to have some ice cream?
Rosy:
Youre very original Eduard. This is the standard date, movie and ice
cream, but I like it a lot though.
Eduard: Youre making me blush. That was my goal, making you have a good time.
Youve worked too much lately. I wanted you to stop for one evening.
Rosy:
I really appreciate that. I needed it. Id like to do this more often.
Eduard: The movie theatre we went to, which is very famous for always having big
celebrities coming in, is one of the biggest in the country.
Rosy:
Thats an interesting fact. I didnt know that. I guess thats why the
employees usually talk down to people.
Eduard: Hows everything at home? Is your neighbor still flirting with you?
Rosy:
Ryan, who is still flirting with me, is not my neighbor any more. Theres
something wrong in the house. I think a pipe clogged up.
Eduard: Ill go to take a look to it tomorrow. Lets go now, its getting late.
Vocabulary:
3
To believe To climb To raise Gal To earn Unforgettable To remind

To sew To end Critics To kill To die To blush To talk down To flirt
Neighbor To clog up Lonely Helpless Creepy Scary To appreciate
Page 104
UNIT SIXTEEN
Transitional Words and Phrases.

Transitional Words and Phrases

Illustration:
Thus, for example, for instance, namely, to illustrate, in other words, in particular,
specifically, such as.
Contrast:
On the contrary, contrarily, notwithstanding, but, however, nevertheless, in spite of,
in contrast, yet, on one hand, on the other hand, rather, or, nor, conversely, at the
same time, while this may be true.
Addition:
And, in addition to, furthermore, moreover, besides, too, also, both-and, another,
equally important, first, second, etc., again, further, last, finally, not only-but also, as
well as, in the second place, next, likewise, similarly, in fact, as a result,
consequently, in the same way, for example, for instance, however, thus, therefore,
otherwise.
Time:
Nowadays, after, afterward, before, then, once, next, last, at last, at length, first,
second, etc., at first, formerly, rarely, usually, another, finally, soon, meanwhile, at
the same time, for a minute, hour, day, etc., during the morning, day, week, etc., most
important, later, ordinarily, to begin with, afterwards, generally, in order to,
subsequently, previously, in the meantime, immediately, eventually, concurrently,
simultaneously.
Space:
At the left, at the right, in the center, on the side, along the edge, on top, below,
beneath, under, around, above, over, straight ahead, at the top, at the bottom,
surrounding, opposite, at the rear, at the front, in front of, beside, behind, next to,
nearby, in the distance, beyond, in the forefront, in the foreground, within sight, out
of sight, across, under, nearer, adjacent, in the background.
Concession:
Although, at any rate, at least, still, thought, even though, granted that, while it may
be true, in spite of, of course.
Similarity:
Similarly, likewise, in like fashion, in like manner, analogous to.
Page 105
Emphasis:
Above all, indeed, truly, of course, certainly, surely, in fact, really, in truth, again,
besides, also, furthermore, in addition.
Details:
Specifically, especially, in particular, to explain, to list, to enumerate, in detail,
namely, including.
Examples:
For example, for instance, to illustrate, thus, in other words, as an illustration, in
particular.
Consequence or Result:
So that, with the result that, thus, consequently, hence, accordingly, for this reason,
therefore, so, because, since, due to, as a result, in other words, then.
Summary:
Therefore, finally, consequently, thus, in short, in conclusion, in brief, as a result,
accordingly.
Suggestion:
For this purpose, to this end, with this in mind, with this purpose in mind, therefore.
Always Remember:

My brother would always ignite paper when he was twelve. He liked fire.
Im used to speaking English. I used to speak Spanish in Latin America.
Shes supposed to be working but shes getting used to being home resting.
Frank was going to redo his chores but he didn't because he was drowsy.
Unless he pays me back, I will retire his petition to buy the new car.
As soon as I get up, I go to the restroom to brush my teeth.
We will go to our cottage on the country if my wife gets healthy.
Angys wore her best dress to go out with Frank.
Eduard had already spoken to your friends to apologize long before you did.
Have you ever tried to learn another language?
Do you know when that guy became a doctor? He hasn't graduated yet.
Hes been studying at the university for five years. Hes about to graduate.
How long has Susie owned her store? How long ago did she renew her stock?
Shed eaten a hamburger before she ate that pizza. Shed like to take a nap.
Lets Practice:
Write an essay on your notebook using as many transitional words and
phrases as you can.
Page 106
UNIT SEVENTEEN
Reported Speech.
Say - Tell
Reported Speech
She said, I was late to work today.
Frank said, Eduard smokes too much.
Susie said, I wanted to buy that car.
Estilo Directo:
Se repite exactamente lo que la
persona dijo, por lo que su
comentario se coloca entre comillas.
Estilo Indirecto
SAY
Say something
TELL
Tell someone something
- Angy will go to school tomorrow.

What did she say?
She said (that) Angy would go to school.
- You are going to read the paper.

What did Angy tell Susie?
She told her she was going to read.
- Frank has studied a lot for his test.

What did he say?
He said (that) Frank had studied a lot.
- Angy, can I borrow your phone?

What did he tell Angy?
He told her if he could borrow her phone.
- Is Susie an earnest person?

What did she say?
She said if Susie was an earnest person?
- Sweep the floor now!

What did she tell her?
She told her to sweep the floor now.
- Eduard says he wants to stop smoking.
- He told his children not to write on walls.

-
Did Eduard ask me to join him in a morning run? Tell him I will sleep late.
He said, I live in the U.S. He said that he lived in the U.S.
She said, Im watching TV She said she was watching TV.
They said, Were going to eat They said they were going to eat.
He said, I will phone her tonight He said he would phone her tonight.
He said, Ive visited Chicago once He said he had visited Chicago once.
She said, I had breakfast this morning She said she had had breakfast.
He said, I had already bought it He said he had already bought it.
Page 107
Dont Forget:
El Reported Speech expresa lo dicho por otra persona y puede ser de dos
maneras, el estilo directo o el estilo indirecto.
El estilo directo reporta exactamente lo que la persona dijo, por lo que se
utiliza el verbo say usualmente en pasado y lo que dijo entre comillas.
El estilo indirecto es el ms usado y expresa lo que dijo la persona sin utilizar
las mismas palabras, por lo que los tiempos verbales deben ser cambiados
para tener la concordancia de tiempos (unit 15) como se muestra en la pgina
anterior en la parte Look for the grammar in the sentences below.
El verbo say se utiliza para hacer preguntas y respuestas generales, es decir,
no estn dirigidas a una persona en especfico. Este verbo siempre est
seguido de lo que se reporta.
El verbo tell se utiliza para hacer preguntas y respuestas a una o varias
personas especificas. Este verbo siempre est seguido de un sujeto o
pronombre objetivo, excepto con tell lies y tell stories.
El conectivo that es opcional, es decir, no es obligatorio colocarlo en
ninguna estructura.
Lets read:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Thanks for coming with me to the university Frank. I need your help more
than ever. This teacher speaks low, so you have to tell me what she says.
Im happy to help you. The teachers coming in. She says good morning.
Did she say something about our test tomorrow?
Shes busy. Let me go and talk to her. Ill tell you what she said in a minute.
Thanks Frank. Go ahead. Ill wait for you here.
Im back. She told me to tell you not to worry because its not tomorrow.
Why isnt it tomorrow? What did she exactly tell you?
She told all the students that she couldnt come tomorrow because she had a
business trip. She said she was going abroad.
Did you ask her if she was going to teach today?
Shes saying something about that now. She says that if there are enough
people, she will give classes. She says there needs to be more than twenty.
Thanks Frank. Youre doing a great job. What is she telling you now?
She told me that she had woken up early to come here, so she would be mad
if she didnt teach.
I can understand her, but I wish no more students show up.
She just told us that we could leave. She says she wont waste her time.
Vocabulary:
3
To be late Earnest To sweep To borrow To visit Help Low To wait

To worry To ignite To be drowsy To retire To apologize To wish
Page 108
UNIT EIGHTEEN
Have someone do something.

Have something done. Agreement
(I must too So must I)
Have someone do something

He has his mother cook breakfast.
We had our bothers do the dishes last night.
Im having my neighbor baby sit my son.
Will she have somebody do her chores?
You havent had anybody walk you home.
Esta estructura nos indica que

el segundo sujeto hace algo
por el sujeto principal de la
oracin.
Have something done

He has his breakfast cooked every morning.
We have had the dishes done by our brothers.
I was going to have my car washed last week.
Did she have her work printed by you?
They have had their house cleaned today.
Esta estructura nos indica que

una accin es realizada sobre
la cosa que se menciona.
Agreement (I must too So must I)

I could play tennis if I wanted to.
He will study math tomorrow.
You should go on vacations.
He could too.
I will too.
We should too.
So could he.
So will I.
So Should we.

-
She always has her male friends carry her bags at school.
Banks have houses foreclosed when the owners don't pay.
Ive had my lawyer audited my account once a year. My father has too.
My mom should have her garden thrived in two weeks. So should mine.
Her girlfriend had her hair dyed yesterday. She has had it dyed many times.
I have the laundry done by the housekeeper twice a week. So do I.
Angy has her friends mock Susie just to annoy her.
Shes having her boyfriend drive her to work right now.
Page 109
Dont Forget:
Have someone do something es la frmula de esta estructura. Se puede

realizar la oracin en cualquier tiempo, adaptando el have al tiempo
utilizado, a esto siempre le sigue un sujeto, luego el verbo en infinitivo y
el complemento.
Esta estructura es muy comn para expresar cuando alguien haga algo por
otra persona, ya sea por un favor o por una orden.
Have something done es la frmula de esta estructura. Se puede realizar
la oracin en cualquier tiempo, adaptando el have al tiempo utilizado, a
esto siempre le sigue un sustantivo, luego el verbo en pasado participio y
el complemento.
Esta estructura es muy comn para expresar cuando una accin es
realizada sobre una cosa.
El tipo de agreement mostrado en esta leccin es un poco ms formal
que los explicados en las lecciones anteriores. La regla general siempre es
Suj + aux + too y So + aux + suj. El auxiliar a utilizar siempre ser el
reflejado en la oracin.
Lets read:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Thanks Frank. I dont know what I would have done without you.
Youre welcome. You can always count on me. You had me reporter
everything that happened to you today.
I needed it. Are you having your car fixed today? Why do we take a taxi?
Yes, I have the mechanic repair my car. I had had it fixed twice this week. I
dont know what its wrong with it. It used to be very reliable.
Dont worry. Im sure he will have it right this time. Susie always has our
father take the car to the same mechanic and he never let us down.
Im having the water tank filled now at home. It was almost empty.
So am I. Our pool takes a lot of water to be filled, so we have had the tank
filled like a million times. Its a must!
You cant forget to have someone open the pipe every day.
If we dont open it every day, we will live like in a desert, with no water.
Id like to watch a movie tonight. Lets buy a new one.
I would like it too, but you will be my ears again.
I feel like Im getting used to it. Are you having some popcorns made?
Not yet. We just decided to watch a movie. I will have Susie make them.
Thats a good sister. Have her call you because we both ran out of credit.
Vocabulary:
3
To baby sit To carry To foreclose Lawyer To audit Garden To thrive

To dye Laundry To mock To fix To fill Reliable To run out
Page 110
UNIT NINETEEN
Unreal past:
would have - could have - should have
Would have
I would have spoken to her but you didn't tell me.
He would have eaten the rest of it but he wasn't there.
She wouldn't have begun to clean without you.
Would they have forgiven him for not showing up?
Could have
The dog could have bitten me on the street.
Angy could have missed that appointment.
There couldn't have been traffic at 3am.
Could he have chosen the right gift?
Situaciones que
nunca sucedieron.
Should have
He should have done all his homework by now.
Susie shouldn't have closed her store on vacations.
She should have hidden his car keys to make him stay.
Should Frank and I have thought about it before?
Suj + would/could/should + have + verbo (participio) + comp.

-
I could have played tennis yesterday but I wouldn't have gone out at night.
Eduard should have studied more so he would have passed his test.
Frank shouldn't have shot that duck. We would have eaten some pizza.
Did you think I shouldn't have lent him my car for the night?
Susie could have got a lot more money with that sale.
Would Angy have entered the classroom with all of us?
Could your little brother have ridden the roller coaster without you?
Should Eduard have stopped smoking a long time ago?
I would have commuted to Mexico last year but I didn't have enough money.
Page 111
Dont Forget:
Las estructuras explicadas en esta leccin indican acciones que nunca se

realizaron en el pasado pero, estando en el presente, se piensa que se hubieran
hecho, pudieran haber hecho o debieron haber hecho.
Al estar presente un auxiliar (would could should) en esta estructura,
siempre el have estar en su forma infinitiva, y el verbo de accin en
participio, sin importar el sujeto que se utilice.
Este tiempo se puede ajustar a cualquier estructura explicada anteriormente.
A pesar de la similitud en la oracin al usar would could should, el
significado y la situacin que expresa cada uno de los auxiliares es distinta.
Would have indica lo que se hubiera hecho, could have expresa lo que se
pudo haber hecho, mientras que should have indica lo que se debi haber
hecho.
Lets read:
Eduard: Hello Rossy. Im glad to see you again. How was your week?
Rossy:
Nice to see you too. It was a nice week, but I could have done a lot more
things I should have done. It was a busy week.
Eduard: Dont worry. Youll have time to get them over with.
Rossy:
Im sure about that. Did you do all the things you wish you would have
done? What are you doing now?
Eduard: Im just hanging out with some friends. Yes, I did everything I had planned
for the week, even more!
Rossy:
Nice to hear that. Have you heard anything about Frank and Susie?
Eduard: I saw them day before yesterday. We gathered at Susies but Frank went
early. He shouldnt have left because he missed all the fun part. I think he
was either mad or tired.
Rossy:
You should have let me know about that meeting. I wanted to go out last
weekend. I could have got rid of some unwelcome visitors.
Eduard: Im sorry. I figured you would be busy. It wont happen again.
Rossy:
Thanks for your understanding. I would have joined you without thinking
about it. Did you let Frank drink? He shouldnt have drunk at all.
Eduard: We were all surprised because he didnt even drink one glass of coke.
Thats difficult to cope with when you are on a diet.
Rossy:
Im happy for him. He should have started this a long time ago. I hope he
loses all the weight he wants and that his effort is rewarded.
Eduard: Give him a call to tell him that and cheer him. He will thank you for that!
Vocabulary:
3
To begin To forgive To choose To pass To shoot To commute To ride

To get over with To wish To hang out To get rid of To figure To cope
To happen To think To cheer Weight To be surprised
Page 112
UNIT TWENTY
Condicionals Type C y D.
Condicional Tipo C
If he studied a little more, he would pass the test.
Unless she shed a tear, he wouldnt explain the lesson.
I would increase salaries if I were the president.
If Frank improved his Spanish, we would travel abroad.
The Smith would buy a new car if they had more money.
Conditional clause (past), result clause (past would)
Condicional Tipo D
If he had won the big price, his life would have been completely different.
Unless she had learned Chinese, she wouldnt have traveled to Asia.
If the Smith had had more money, they would have bought a new car.
Frank wouldn't have started eaten if he had known that you were coming.
Susie and Angy wouldn't have come if they had stayed in the pool.
Conditional clause (past participle), result clause (unreal past)

-
If I were rich, I would buy a castle so I could live with my loved ones.
I would go to a doctors office to a complete checkout if I were you.
If I had known that you were at the hospital, I would have visited you.
If pigs had wings, they would be able to fly. That's a common platitude.
You could have got a new laptop if you had saved some money.
If she had trained for a whole year, she shouldve participated on the contest.
If you had been on time more often, your boss wouldn't have fired you.
Unless they had stayed in New York, they wouldnt have found a new job.
Page 113
Dont Forget:
Un condicional est formado por dos oraciones, un condicional y un resultado.
Si se comienza la oracin con el condicional, esta debe estar separada del
resultado por una coma, s no la coma no se coloca.
El condicional unless es sinnimo de ifnot, es decir, unless he hurries
up tambin podra ser escrito if he doesnt hurry up.
Los condicionales tipo C son llamados el condicional irreal porque este
expresa situaciones irreales, imposibles o improbables. Este indica un
resultado imaginario para una situacin dada y se forma con pasado simple en
el condicional y pasado con would en la oracin del resultado.
Los condicionales tipo D se le conocen tambin como el condicional del
pasado puesto que tanto la condicin como el resultado son situaciones
hipotticas que toman lugar en el pasado, dando un resultado posible pero
irreal. Est estructura se forma con pasado perfecto en la oracin del
condicional y pasado irreal en la oracin del resultado.
Lets read:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Ill call him to see how hes doing but give me his number because I lost it.
If I had had it before, I would have called him a long time ago.
I would go to a coffee shop to take it there if I were you.
Are you asking me out? Would you like to have some coffee?
Sure, you read my mind! Thanks for the invitation. Id have dressed up a
little better if I had known that we were going out.
It doesnt matter because we arent going to a fancy coffee shop. Unless I
change my outfit, we arent going to the one on the corner.
Lets go to your house, that way I get to poke your pet. Its fun.
Let my pet alone! I wouldnt have invited you in last time if you had told
me that you were going to annoy my pet that much.
I apologized for that. I like this coffee shop because they sell folk food and
they play folk music.
I like it too but they are giving in the rest of the market. They are losing big
profit. If I were them, I would start expanding the business.
Youre always thinking about work, as usual. I thought you were resting.
Youll know when I get some rest. I would be at my house now lying in
bed if I didnt meet you tonight.
Are you calling me a nuisance? Because of me youre still on the street.
Actually, I like being outside at the moment because Im not that tired.
Vocabulary:
3
To shed Tear To increase To improve Checkout Wing Platitude

To train Contest To fire To dress up Fancy Outfit To apologize
To poke Folk To give in Profit To expand To lie - Nuisance
Page 114
SPECIAL PRACTICE
During class time, you are going to watch a video and listen to a radio report,
after you completely understand what they are about, do the following exercises:
1. Write a letter complaining about what you heard on the radio report. You have
to start with a brief introduction, then give your opinions and explain what
youre complaining about.
2. Write an essay about the video. You have to be completely impartial when
explaining what you saw on it.
Complaining Letter
Page 115
Write an essay about the video. You have to be completely impartial when explaining
what you saw on it.
Essay
Page 116
UNIT TWENTY-ONE
Condicionals Type A, B, C, D.
Condicionales Tipo A, B, C, D
TIPO A
TIPO B
TIPO C
TIPO D
Examples
If I get money, I buy a car. (Ambos casos son verdaderos, se puede utilizar when)
If I get the money, I will buy a car. (Si la condicin se cumple, el resultado tambin)
If I got the money, I would buy a car. (Hace referencia a un presente imaginario)
If I had got the money, I would have bought a car. (Indica un pasado hipottico)

-
If I meet with Rossy at her office, I always have lunch with her.
If Rossy lingers after work, I will take her out to dinner and movies.
If Frank flew to another country, I wouldn't miss the chance to join him.
If Susie had known that, she would have kept her store open the whole week.
My parents take me to school unless I wake up early.
I will ride my horse in the afternoon unless it rains.
I would have an exam if I came earlier to the university.
The girls would have sobbed if they hadnt seen their dog be healthy again.
If the teacher finishes the lesson today, I will depict an example to you.
When she gets hungry, she shouts and yells to everybody.
Susie wont be in a good mood unless you clean up all this mess.
Page 117
Dont Forget:
Los condicionales tipo A son situaciones que siempre son verdaderas si algo
pasa y usualmente pueden ser reemplazadas por la clusula de tiempo when.
Los condicionales tipo B indican una situacin real o posible y toma lugar
cuando la condicin se cumple .
Los condicionales tipo C son llamados el condicional irreal porque este
expresa situaciones irreales, imposibles o improbables. Est indica un
resultado imaginario para una situacin dada y se forma con pasado simple en
el condicional y pasado con would en la oracin del resultado.
Los condicionales tipo D se le conocen tambin como el condicional del
pasado puesto que tanto la condicin como el resultado son situaciones
hipotticas que toman lugar en el pasado, dando un resultado posible pero
irreal. Esta estructura se forma con pasado perfecto en la oracin del
condicional y pasado irreal en la oracin del resultado.
Lets read & Lets Practice:

Its your turn to continue the dialogue using conditionals in every sentence!
Page 118
UNIT TWENTY-TWO
Verbo + gerundio
- Avoid
- Appreciate
- Admit
- Consider
- Enjoy
- Prevent
- Postpone
- Finish
Verbo+gerundio / Verbo+gerundio o inf.

Conectivos even though even if
- Dislike
- Deny
- Risk
- Mind
- Forgive
- Suggest
- Detest
- Get used to
- Keep
- Delay
- Imagine
- Excuse
- Understand
- Cant help
- Cant stand
- Be used to
Examples
- Frank admits doing his work a day before even though he is hard working.
- Susie suggested going to the movies even if we didn't finish studying.
- I avoid sitting next to people who smokes even though I like the smell of cigars.
Verbo + gerundio o inf.
- Begin
- Start
- Attempt
- Forget
- Beg
- Love
- Like
- Prefer
- Remember
- Continue
- Regret
- Permit
- Stop
- Try
- Hate
Examples
- Angy began working two weeks ago and she started to attend the university today.
- Susie will try seizing the documents even though she could get in trouble.
- I have remembered taking out the trash now even if it isnt full.

-
I would appreciate having a cup of coffee please even if its not hot.
He cant help playing ping pong every day even though he gets really tired.
Angy attempts to study in the morning and to work in the afternoon.
Frank cant stand lurking his friend even though he has to take care of him.
I think Susie will forget to bring the poker cards again even if we remind her.
Can we continue trying to get this done? I am starting to get sick.
Your son denied drawing on my wall with a dark marker. Do you believe
him?
I will postpone traveling to Asia even if my partner doesn't want to do it.
Page 119
Dont Forget:
El gerundio es el verbo conjugado en presente progresivo, es decir, con ing.

Los verbos en la lista de Verbos + gerundios, al estar seguido de una accin,
el verbo debe estar conjugado con ing.
Los verbos en la lista de Verbos + gerundio o inf., al estar seguido de una
accin, el verbo puede estar en gerundio o en su forma infinitiva sin alterar el
significado.
Los verbos stop try pueden ir seguidos de gerundio o infinitivo pero no
cumple la regla anterior, si se varia la conjugacin, tambin varia el
significado de la oracin.
Stop + inf parar para Stop + gerundio parar de.
Try+inf hacer un intento de Try+gerundio hacer una prueba de
Even though es un conectivo similar al aunque que introduce una oracin
declaratoria.
Even if es un conectivo similar al incluso que introduce una oracin
condicional.
Lets read:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
What do you think if we play a question game so that we can get to know
each other a little more?
That sounds like a good idea. Let me begin! Do you consider bluffing
when playing poker?
I wont answer that. Youll never beat me at poker! Do you mind sharing
youre cigars with other people?
Yes, I do. Im not selfish but it bothers me when you take advantage of my
good will. Did you stop to smoke out of the car?
No, I didnt. I stopped smoking. I felt awful yesterday. I tried to go to bed
early but I couldnt fall sleep. I tried taking an aspirin but it didnt work.
Do you regret to have worked so hard yesterday?
I dont regret anything that I do but I think I went over the line yesterday.
Do you detest drinking beer? Do you prevent going out late to work?
I like to drink a can of beer every now and then. I always leave my house
early so I can avoid traffic. Could you imagine Angy drinking beer?
No, I couldnt even if I tried hard. Do you hate to walk around your place?
Yes, I do. I dont like walking. Thats the reason of me having a car.
Its also the reason of us not having a healthy planet. Havent you heard of
global warming? Its been a lot in the news lately.
Vocabulary:
3
To avoid - To appreciate - To deny - To delay - Cant help - Cant stand - To beg

To regret - To seize - To attempt - To lurk - To remind - To draw - To bluff
To answer - To beat - Will - Awful - To imagine - To share - Selfish
Page 120
UNIT TWENTY-THREE
Adjetive + ed -- Adjetive + ing

For - since - already - yet - never - ever
Adjetive + ed -- Adjetive + ing

I think Angy is confused with the dates.
Frank was so embarrassed when he fell down.
Susie got really annoyed last Sunday afternoon.
I don't like this class. Im bored.
Rossy was shocked when she saw her little brother.
Adjetivos que terminen en ed

describen como se siente la
persona.
Have you had an interesting day?

I think its exciting to travel abroad.
The idea of us not having fun is depressing.
Playing a complete soccer game is exhausting.
Isnt it frightening to think that it wont be done?
Adjetivos que terminen en ing

describen el efecto de algo
sobre tus sentimientos.
For - Since - Already - Yet - Never - Ever

Frank has taught English for a year.
I already know how to speak French.
Angy will never react hastily.
Frank has taught English since 2008.

I don't know how to speak French yet.
Angy won't ever react hastily.

-
It was surprising to have seen her giving an amazing speech.

I was stunned when she told me all the accomplishments she had done!
Susie found a charming guy at the bank line but he was a little worried.
It's fascinating that Eduard finally decided to stop smoking.
The idea of having to go to the university on Saturdays is upsetting.
Havent they dealt with their own problems yet?
I was never pleased with where I used to live. Im excited to finally move.
Eduard will never play soccer. It's too tiring for him because he isnt athletic.
A bored student complained to his teacher about having the exam
rescheduled.
Page 121
Dont Forget:
Los adjetivos que terminen en ing toman el significado ser del to be. Los
adjetivos que terminen en ed toman el significado estar del to be.
Los adjetivos que terminen en ed describen como se siente la persona. Los
adjetivos que terminen en ing describen el efecto de algo sobre los
sentimientos.
Se utilizan adjetivos con ing para describir los efectos que algo tiene sobre
los sentimientos y para describir algo que contina en un perodo de tiempo.
Lets read:
Rossy:
Im really excited because Im going away on vacations.
Eduard: Thats great. Frank has been annoying me for about 2 weeks because he
wants us to gather some friends to stay at the beach house.
Rossy:
Cheer up! It is always good to take a break. Im concerned about my return
because it is three days after my vacations finishes.
Eduard: Youre a hard working person. Im sure that if you ask 3 more days off to
your boss, he will give them to you.
Rossy:
I hope you are right, however, my boss has been feeling a little defeated
because sales havent increased. He wants people to work all the time.
Eduard: Thats tiring! I am sometimes frustrated at my job because I feel that my
superiors dont notice what I do.
Rossy:
Dont be shocked. They are interested in your work but they cant always
show you that.
Eduard: I know that but compliments would make us happier at the work place.
Rossy:
Do you feel frightened about having them fire you?
Eduard: I know they wont do it because my job is unique.
Rossy:
Thats all you need to know to work in peace.
Eduard: Good point. I feel relaxed now. Thanks.
Rossy:
Dont mention it. I have to go now. See you later.
Eduard: Bye. Nice talking to you.
Vocabulary:
3
Activity: find all the adjective of this lesson and make sentences using ed and
ing endings with each one.
Page 122
UNIT TWENTY-FOUR
Animals
Members of
a family
Ant
Apes
Bat
Bear
Bird
Buffalo
Camel
Cat
Cow
Crocodile
Deer
Dog
Animals. Members of a Family.

Dolphin
Donkey
Elephant
Fish
Fox
Frog
Giraffe
Hippopotamus
Horse
Kangaroo
Leopard
Lion
Father
Dad
Mother
Mom
Parents
Child
Children
Son
Daughter
Brother
Sister
Grandfather
Granddad
Grandmother
Mice
Ostrich
Parrot
Penguin
Pigeon
Pig
Rabbit
Rat
Rhino
Seal
Shark
Sheep
Grandma
Grandson
Granddaughter
Grandchild
Uncle
Aunt
Cousin
Nephew
Niece
Boyfriend
Girlfriend
Fianc
Bride
Groom
Snake
Squirrel
Tiger
Turtle
Wale
Vulture
Wolf
Zebra
Wife
Husband
Spouse
Father-in-law
Mother-in-law
Parents-in-law
Son-in-law
Daughter-in-law
Brother-in-law
Sister-in-law
Godfather
Godmother
Page 123
Always Remember:

Angy told me she had been working all morning to type your report.
Frank said he would have gone if we had told him a day earlier.
Susie says to stand up and speak up. She says we cant stay in silence.
I have been having my sister cook lunch for four hours.
Angy had her homework done three days before the rest of the students.
Susie will always have her partner close the store from now on.
I would like to have seen the dinosaurs in their natural habitat.
Eduard couldn't have stopped smoking two years ago because he was stressed.
Frank shouldn't have done what he did because all his friends are mad at him.
When it rains, Im not able to go to school because I would get sick.
If my computer breaks down, I will lose all my work.
Homeless people would steal those tents if the police men werent here.
What would have happened if I had told you that I didn't have the money?
Rossy would continue going to work even if there was heavy snow outside.
This trip is boring because every signal is confusing and gets us lost.
Theres a salesman at the door. Throw him out because Im not interested.
Lets Practice:
Give a short description of every animal mention above. What do they do?
Where do they live? Do you like them? What do they eat? What is your favorite?
NOTE: each student must select a topic for the presentation in unit thirtytwo of this book.
Page 124
UNIT TWENTY-FIVE
Passive Voice en todos los tiempos.
Passive Voice
Object + To be (any tense) + Verb (past participle) + Comp.
Object + Aux. + To be + Verb (past participle) + Comp.
En el Passive Voice, la accin recae sobre el

objeto de la oracin. Se forma con verbo To Be
ms un verbo de accin en pasado participo.
Active Voice
- Frank makes a phone call.
- Frank made a phone call.
- Frank will make a phone call.
- Franks making a phone call.
- Frank was making a phone call.
- Frank has made a phone call.
- Frank had made a phone call.
- Frank should make a phone call.
- Frank could make a phone call.
- Frank must make a phone call.
Passive Voice

- A phone call is made.

(Present)
- A phone call was made.
(Past)
- A phone call will be made.
(Future)
- A phone call is being made.
(Prog.)
- A phone call was being made. (Prog.)
- A phone call has been made. (Perfect)
- A phone call had been made. (Perfect)
- A phone call should be made.
- A phone call could be made.
- A phone call must be made.

-
Why don't you send a letter to your mom? A letter should be done by you.
Everyone at the party was fooled because nobody famous showed up.
The classrooms were damaged by all the students. They were punished.
All the clothes were being ironed to us by the housekeeper.
Cancer was overcome by Lance Armstrong. He fought a lot.
Every topic was defined by the teacher. Im finally ready for the exam.
Doa Barbara was written by Romulo Gallegos a long time ago.
Page 125
Dont Forget:
Voz Pasiva o Passive Voice es de uso muy comn en el ingls, tanto formal
como informal y para que se pueda estructurar la oracin debe contar con un
objeto directo o indirecto, ya que este ser el sujeto.
Se puede utilizar en cualquier tiempo, conjugando el verbo to be de la
manera adecuada y agregando el auxiliar correspondiente. Los tiempos
utilizados en la voz pasiva estn en la pgina anterior.
Al introducir un verbo modal en el Passive Voice, el verbo to be quedar
en infinitivo. El tiempo progresivo requiere un primer verbo to be
conjugado en el tiempo deseado, y un segundo being para crear el
progresivo, ms el verbo en pasado participio.
Lets read:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Do you remember our pact dear sister? I dont think so for the way the
house is looking. I thought we were going to keep it clean.
You did never put enthusiasm on that plan, so I didnt do anything.
Thats not an excuse. Was the kitchen cleaned? Were the pets bathed?
If you didnt do that, then the answer is no. Im bruised. I was hit by many
tennis balls today. The game was awful.
The balls arent alive. You could have moved to avoid them.
I was too sleepy because when I went, all my subjects had already been
studied.
Thats nice to hear, but the house still looks hideous. Start cleaning!
The house wont be cleaned just by me. The food will be cooked. The
garbage will be emptied. The floor will be swept and that will be done just
by you.
Half of that had already been done before you said it. The rest of the work
will be divided by two.
I agree. By the way, were the clothes sold at the store?
What clothes are you talking about? There are a lot in it.
Im talking about winter season clothes. Were they purchased by
costumers? They looked nice when I saw them.
Most of them were bought by mothers because they liked the discounts.
It was said that was a good idea. Did the sales leave us good profit?
Yes, it did. Lets continue with this.
You are right. More cleaning and less talking.
Vocabulary:
3
To send To fool To show up To damage To punish To iron

Housekeeper To overcome To fight To define Pact To put Enthusiasm
To bath To be bruised To hit Hideous To empty - Profit
Page 126
UNIT TWENTY-SIX
Expressions with Get.
Expressions with Get

- Get a degree
- Get mad at
- Get dark
- Get dressed
- Get exited
- Get light
- Get lost
- Get married
- Get old
- Get sea/car/plane sick
- Get sick
- Get rest
- Get tired
- Get up
- Get well
- Get wet
- Get a certificate
- Get a job
- Get a scholarship
- Get a good/bad seat
- Get a good/bad grade
- Get a letter
- Get a message
- Get a package
- Get a present
- Get breakfast/lunch
- Get back
- Get downtown
- Get here
- Get home
- Get there
- Get a promotion
- Get a raise
- Get off work
- Get to work
- Get in a car
- Get out of a car
- Get on a bus/airplane
- Get off a bus/airplane
- Get through reading
- Get sleepy
- Get hungry
- Get nervous
- Get mixed up
- Get thirsty
- Get cloudy
- Get cold
- Get foggy
- Get warm
- Get windy
- Get along with
- Get late
- Get ready
- Get away
- Get ahead
- Get by
- Get something done

-
My sister got an engineer degree five years ago. She got a great job.
Frank will get on that bus tomorrow to get away from us. He got mad.
I got a promotion this afternoon. Im very excited because I will get by easier.
Did she get ready? If she doesn't, were going to get there late.
Hey Susie, let the tour guide get ahead because you don't know the way.
Page 127
Dont Forget:
Estas expresiones estn compuestas por el verbo get principalmente, por lo

que se le debe aplicar las reglas de un verbo, se debe conjugar en tercera
persona en presente simple y al estar junto a un auxiliar, el verbo queda en
infinitivo.
Se debe tener en cuenta que esto es una muestra, si se sigue la misma regla de
estructuracin utilizada, se puede formar ms expresiones con este verbo. El
get ms un adjetivo es un verbo.
Es importante entender el significado de cada uno y el contexto adecuado para
utilizarlos, son muy comunes al hablar, por lo que es crucial su aprendizaje.
Lets read:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Did you get mad at me because I made you clean the house?
No, I didnt. I understand its something that needs to be done. Is it getting
dark already? Its only six oclock. It should be dusk.
Thats weird. Anyway, did you get dressed up to your date yesterday?
Yes, I did. Too bad you didnt get to see me. I was told I looked beautiful.
Good for you. You made a great impression. We women have to do that
before we either get married or get old.
Thats so true. Are we going to travel this vacation? I dont want to get on
an airplane because I get plane sick.
If we do travel, I want to go to another country, so youll take a aspirin to
fall asleep and get some rest. You wont even realize when we take off.
Did Eduard get a scholarship when he was studying?
No, he didnt but he has got many job offers everywhere.
Did he get well after he quit smoking? Did he get through reading the new
engineer book? He told us he was going to get a promotion, did he?
Youre asking many questions about him. He got well. He doesnt smoke
now. He did get through reading the book. In fact, he finished it in a week.
I havent spoken to him in a while, so I dont know if he got promoted.
Its just that I havent heard from him in a long time. Do you know what
we are doing this weekend? I heard many things and I got mixed up.
I actually dont know. I got confused too. Are you getting along with
Franks new friend? Hes sometimes a little impolite, isnt he?
He is a little rude but I got a present from him, so he isnt that bad. Im
starting to get hungry. Lets cook something.
I agree. Too much cleaning makes me hungry.
Vocabulary:
3
Activity: find the meaning of every expression with get and make sentences using
each one.
Page 128
UNIT TWENTY-SEVEN
Different uses of the ing.

As a Verb
- My friends are delivering some flyers.

- Rossy is accomplishing everything that she wants.
- Many people were fainting at the concert.
- Most of the populations are embracing new religions.
Progressive tense:
To be + verb + ing.
As an Adjective
- He is a working person.
- Eduard had a smoking problem.
- Thats a sewing machine.
- Did you see a flying pig?
Adjective + noun
As a Noun
- No running.
- No shouting.
- Lets continue studying.
Name of an action.
As a Subject
- Running and swimming are good exercise.
- Drinking much alcohol gets you drunk.
- Loitering is not allowed in school areas.
- I think about playing tennis tonight.
- I believe that working hard pays off.
Any verb with ing can be a subject.

If a verb is placed after a preposition,
it must be with -ing.

-
Eating too much isnt good for health and can make you fat.
Making exercise is great. It helps you feel better about yourself.
The morning rising sun gives you energy to go out to seize the day.
No running is allowed inside the hospital facilities.
I have been waiting for you all day. Where have you been?
Frank is a joking person. He makes funny comments out of everything.
Page 129
Dont Forget:
Para usar el ing como verbo, se debe utilizar el to be en la conjugacin

deseada para que indique progresivo.
Para usar el ing como adjetivo, el verbo lo debe poseer y estar ubicado antes
de un noun, el cual ser modificado segn el adjetivo colocado.
El ing utilizado como un noun tiene la funcin de nombrar una accin para
que el mismo pueda ser utilizado en otras partes de la oracin.
Para usar el ing como sujeto, el verbo conjugado debe estar colocado al
principio de la oracin y se debe completar con un verbo ms un
complemento.
Una preposicin siempre debe ir seguida de un noun, por lo que al querer
hacer referencia a una accin, el verbo debe estar conjugado con ing
Lets read:
Frank:
We finally go out again buddy. Getting old means getting more work.
Eduard: Working means getting money and, I dont know about you, but I want to
be very well off in a near future.
Frank:
I agree with you. Being wealthy is great but working hard is the way to get
there. Have you met the new neighbors? They seem to be rich.
Eduard: Im thinking about welcoming them. Do you think throwing a party would
be nice? Making it a surprise sounds excellent.
Frank:
I think that they arent dancing people. They seem to be serious.
Eduard: Thats ok. We can make a sort of welcoming meeting with everybody.
Frank:
Good idea! You are really looking forward to partying soon.
Eduard: I really am! Its been too much work lately.
Frank:
Do you remember our university years? Studying and having fun all day
long! No running and no smoking in the campus. We always did.
Eduard: I do remember. Getting passed that has been difficult.
Frank:
Everybody was used to having drinking problems and being hangover.
Eduard: That was the funniest. Seeing all the drunken personalities was interesting.
Frank:
We should get in touch with everybody of our prom. Wouldnt it be fun?
Eduard: It would be hilarious seeing how everybody has changed and what their life
is like. Have you know something about the singing girl?
Frank:
I havent heard from her! I wonder if she is still singing. She did very well.
Eduard: Contacting our old friends is something that I havent done!
Frank:
Neither have I. Thats why Im looking forward to gathering with them.
Eduard: Looking for them on Facebook would be a nice start.
Frank:
Sure! Well find everybody there. Start searching please!
Vocabulary:
3
To deliver To accomplish To faint To embrace To sew To shout Health

To loiter To rise To seize To allow Facilities To joke Buddy Wealthy
To seem To be well off To throw To look forward To start
Page 130
UNIT TWENTY-EIGHT
Word Order.
Expressions for making suggestions.
Word Order
Do you often write your boss letters?
I sold my cousin a new car.
Do you often write letters for your boss?

I sold a new car to my cousin.
Oraciones con un verbo y dos complementos. (Unit 3)

Where?
Frank went quickly to her mothers house when she called.
How?
When?
El orden en el
complemento es:
How? Where? When?
Susie sometimes gets up late.

Frank always works hard.
I often play tennis at night.
Susie is hardly ever home.

Frank and I are never together.
She is seldom away on vacation.
Ive frequently gone there.

Have you ever visited France?
Did Susie usually wipe the table?

Will Rosy always weep after she leaves?
Expressions for
making suggestions
- Do you like?
- What if?
-What about?
- Would you like?
- Do you agree with?
- How about?
- Why don't?
- Lets?
- Lets not
- Maybe we could?
- Should we?
- Don't you want to?

-
Have you always gone to the US on December? Lets not go this time!
How about lurking at the coffee shop until Angy gets here?
Why don't we cuddle and watch a movie tonight instead of going out?
Do you often eat lunch in a restaurant or do you always take it with you?
I would have never done that if you had told me it was wrong.
Page 131
Dont Forget:
Las oraciones de un verbo y dos complementos constan de uno directo y uno

indirecto. El directo es de lo que se habla y el indirecto es a quien va referida
la accin, se pueden interponer mediante el uso de preposiciones (Unit 3).
El orden en las palabras dentro de un complemento es How? When? Where?.
Los adverbios de frecuencia se colocan antes de un verbo de accin pero
despus del verbo to be.
Expresions for making suggestions son utilizadas para dar algn punto de
vista o proponer algn plan. Estas expresiones, what about? how about?
do you agree with? deben ir seguidas de un sujeto, sea pronombre o un
verbo conjugado con ing por terminar con una preposicin, el resto de las
expresiones le sigue el infinitivo.
Lets read:
Frank &
Eduard:
Its your turn to continue the dialog. Create a plan for us to do next week. It
can be anything, but make sure you use as many expressions as you can.
Vocabulary:
3
To write - To visit - To wipe - To weep - To play - To lurk - To cuddle - Instead
Page 132
UNIT TWENTY-NINE
Reading. General grammatical practice

from unit 1 to 28.
Free Writing
Free writing is a writing technique in which a person writes continuously for a set
period of time without regard to spelling, grammar or topic. It produces raw, often
unusable material, but allows a writer to overcome blocks of apathy and selfcriticism. It is used mainly by prose writers and writing teachers. This technique is
also used by some writers to collect their initial thoughts and ideas on a topic, and is
often used as a preliminary to more formal writing. It is not a form of automatic
writing.
The technique involves continuous writing, usually for a predetermined period of
time (often 5, 10, or 15 minutes). Writing is done without regard to spelling,
grammar, etc., and no corrections are made. If the writer reaches a point where he or
she cannot think of anything to write, then he or she writes that he or she cannot think
of anything, until another line of thought is found. The writer allows himself or
herself to stray off topic and to just let his or her thoughts lead wherever they may. At
times, a writer may also do a focused freewrite where a chosen topic structures his or
her thoughts. Expanding from this topic, the thoughts may stray to make connections
and create more abstract views on the topic. This technique helps a writer to explore a
particular subject before putting ideas into a more basic context.
Here are the essential rules that are often formulated for the beginners or students:
- Give yourself a time limit. Write for one or ten or twenty minutes, and then
stop.
- Keep your hand moving until the time is up. Do not pause to stare into space
or to read what you've written. Write quickly but not in a hurry.
- Pay no attention to grammar, spelling, punctuation, neatness, or style. Nobody
else needs to read what you produce here. The correctness and quality of what
you write do not matter; the act of writing does.
- If you get off the topic or run out of ideas, keep writing anyway. If necessary,
write nonsense or whatever comes into your head, or simply scribble.
- If you feel bored or uncomfortable as you're writing, ask yourself what's
bothering you and write about that.
- When the time is up, look over what you've written, and mark passages that
contain ideas or phrases that might be worth keeping.
Page 133
Lets Practice:
What was the reading about? After you get the main idea and write a
paragraph about it, lets make a 15 minutes session of free writing.
Page 134
UNIT THIRTY
Interaction with classmates. Questions

and answers about the presentations.
Lets Practice:
1. Take notes of all your friends presentations.
Page 135
2. Ask questions to your friends to answer your doubts about the topics.
Write the questions and the answers.
Page 136
SPECIAL PRACTICE
Activity: write a song, a poem, a letter or an opinion about an important issue.
Give your opinions about it and explain why you chose that option. You will read
your writing in front of the class.
Page 137
THIRD
LEVEL
5ft u w|z {t | xvxt? {x w {t | |ux?

tw wwx tx w|z {x ||uxA5
@ fA Ytv| y T||
Page 138
UNIT ONE -- Its always nice talking to you!

Improving Communication Skills.

Writing and speaking Activity
Storytelling Techniques to Improve Your Communication Skills

Storytelling is the "mother" of all communications. Every art form relies on
Story to convey meaning. Despite this truth, many communicators only approach
storytelling as an adjunct to their speaking and presenting. This quick article is about
oral storytelling, not digital storytelling that does not rely or build on a presenter's
public speaking skills. Its suggested that mastering oral or traditional storytelling
should be at the top of every speaker's list of priorities.
Here are three foundational reasons on how storytelling helps you improve
your presentation skills:
1. Storytelling teaches you to think on your feet. When you learn to be a good
storyteller, telling stories to all sizes of audiences from 2 or 2000 people, you must
learn to adjust your energy and pace to match the audience reaction. Reading or
understanding the mood, energy and desires of your audience is a good
communication skill at all levels.
2. Storytelling teaches you to be spontaneous. While you are learning to tell a story,
you focus on thinking about your story in an outline form, or episode-by-episode.
Good storytellers do not memorize their stories word-for-word and do not use notes
or other ways of reading their stories. No matter how you are communicating, it is
never a good idea to deliver a canned, memorized speech to anyone. As a storyteller,
you learn to rely on your ability to see a story as it happens, letting different parts of
the story take precedence at different times. You will never tell a story the same way
twice just as you should never speak to an audience like any audience before it.
3. Storytelling helps you to think about the deeper meanings of your content. Almost
all stories carry some type of moral or ethical message and understanding. As you
adapt personal and world stories to your presentations, you will start thinking deeper
about the meaning of your communications. Of course, you may or may not act on
those meanings, but you will generally find your presentations more satisfying as you
understand their impact on your listeners.
All cultures use storytelling. It is a universal language and a core-skill for all
presenters. The best public-speaking tip: seek out learning and coaching in the art of
storytelling and work stories into all your presentations.
Page 139
Lets Write:
Select one of your memories, something that you would like to share and write one
paragraph about it as if you were telling a story.
Lets Talk:
-
Share your memory, but be careful, you shouldn't read it; you must remember
what happened and why you chose that one and just tell your classmates the
story.
Ask the people around you the following questions:
*What do you say to a person whom you havent seen for a long time?
*What do you think are good questions to begin, keep, and end a
conversation?
*What do you usually speak about with your friends and relatives?
*Are people hypocrite when talking to a person they don't like and pretend
they do?
Page 140
UNIT TWO How have you been doing?

Perfect Progressive Tense.
Present Perfect Progressive Tense.

Frank has been working for eight straight hours.
Ive been taking this train since I was a junior.
Shes been going to parties every weekend.
My sons team has been winning for three weeks.
Have we been telling the complete story to them?
Havent I been trying to reach you all day long?
Eduard hasn't been smoking anymore, has he?
They havent been studying hard enough.
El Perfect Progressive Tense

expresa que una accin ha
estado sucediendo desde algn
momento en el pasado y
todava es recurrente en el
presente.
Past Perfect Progressive Tense.

Frank had been working before he came here this morning.
Id been taking this train when I worked downtown.
Shed been going to parties every weekend before she got sick.
My sons team had been winning until they confronted them.
Had we been telling the complete story to them?
Hadnt I been trying to reach you yesterday before I left?
Eduard hadn't been smoking when I arrived, had he?
They hadnt been studying hard enough before the test.
El
Past
Progressive
Tense expresa que una
accin estaba sucediendo
recurrentemente en el
pasado antes de que otra
accin sucediera tambin
el pasado.

- Ive been walking four blocks and I still havent found the institute.
- Frank had been sleeping for ten hours before he took his trip, so he was
-
awake.
Why havent Angy been making exercise to improve her strength?
I cant believe you have been telling all my secrets to everybody.
Eduard had been drawing a draft for you to use, but you left without it.
Teenagers have been lying to their parents about smoking cigars.
What have I been doing? I have made a terrible mistake!
How has Rossy been working so hard and she still has time to hang out?
Had she been dressing up early enough so she would be ready before I
arrived?
Im sorry but I hadnt been calling you when you phone me. I lied to you.
Page 141
Dont Forget:
El tiempo perfecto continuo expresa acciones que comenzaron en algn punto

en el pasado y todava se realizan pero de una manera recurrente.
Este tiempo es muy comn para expresar ideas como lo que sueles y estas
acostumbrado a hacer desde algn momento en el pasado, lo que ha estado
pasando o una situacin de recurrencia en la vida diaria.
El tiempo Pasado Perfecto Continuo expresa acciones realizadas
recurrentemente que comenzaron y terminaron en el pasado antes de
ejecutarse otra accin tambin empezada y concluida en el pasado, el tiempo
de esta ltima est en pasado simple debido a que ocurre despus de la accin
en el pasado perfecto.
El pasado perfecto usualmente se utiliza en el Report Speech cuando se
reporta una accin ya ocurrida.
Lets Read:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy:
Eduard:
Rossy, how have you been? I was beginning to miss you.

Im doing fine, what about you? Ive been travelling a lot. I love it but I
always miss my family and friends.
I know that but its the best for you. What do you do when you arrive to a
country for the first time?
I have always been a little shy but just the first day, after that Im friendly
to everybody so I can make some new friends.
Thats great! Have you been visiting the best touristic places?
Of course, Ive been working a lot but Ive always found some free time to
go around the place and know the city.
Thats the best part of working abroad. What do you usually say to a
person you just met?
I had been asking a guy how the weather was before I left the airport. Two
days before, that same guy had been robbing a liquor store. Thats just a
weird coincidence.
Its almost unbelievable. Had the police been trying to find him? If they
did, they sucked because you found him first.
Anyways, has Susie been keeping her store open?
Yes, she has but she hasnt been working there. She had hired three new
employees before you left Brazil to go to Canada. I got to go. Bye.
Lets Talk:
-
What do you usually say or ask to a person you want to meet?

What are some common questions you make to try to be friendly to
somebody?
Is it rude to ask about romantic or financial stability to someone you just met?
Why would you want to make new friends abroad?
Page 142
UNIT THREE What will you have done?

Future Perfect and Future Perfect

Progressive.
Future Perfect
I will have done all my chores by tomorrow.
Frank will have already sung when you get here.
Hell have begun to work before he realizes it.
Susie wont have sold any skirt during winter.
Will we have hidden before he finishes counting?
Theyll have left by four oclock, wont they?
Angy and I will have gone out before you notice.
El Future Perfect relaciona

el tiempo pasado con respecto
al futuro y expresa una accin
que ya habr pasado para ese
entonces.
Suj. + will (not) have + Verb (participle) + comp.

Future Perfect Progressive
TV will have been broadcasting for a long time by the year 2050.
Ill have been working at the same place for 15 years by 2020.
Youll have been waiting for an hour when she finally arrives.
How long will men have been flying by the year 2030?
Men will have been flying for many years by then.
By the time I leave, I will have been living here for nine years.
Will Rossy have been travelling for two years tomorrow?
Frank wont have been smoking for two years day after tomorrow.
Expresa el periodo
de tiempo en la cual
una
accin
ha
estado
pasando
continuamente hasta
un punto en el
futuro.
Suj. + will (not) have been + Verb (ing) + comp.

-
Ill have been driving the same car for fifteen years next week.
Frank will have been travelling for twenty hours so he will be tired.
Susie and Angy will have told me your secret by the end of the week.
She wont have got the car next month because she isnt working hard.
Will they have been watching TV for ten straight hours by eight oclock?
Youll have perfected your English by the time you finish your course.
I will have got promoted by the end of the year because Ive done a great job.
Page 143
Dont Forget:
El Future Perfect se utiliza para expresar la duracin de una accin que ya

est ocurriendo antes de un punto en el futuro o de una accin que se habr
completado para ese momento especifico.
El Future Perfect Progressive expresa que la accin se ha estado realizando
de manera continua desde el pasado hasta un punto especifico en el futuro y
muestra duracin de tiempo o el termino de dicha accin.
Para ambos casos, es posible cambiar el will por el be going to.
El Future Progressive expresa una accin que pasar para un momento en el
futuro mientras que el Future Perfect Progressive indica que la accin a
estado pasando hasta ese punto.
Los adverbios en esta estructura van colocados entre el will y el have.
Lets Read:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
How is it going Angy? I can see youre studying really hard.

Im always studying. Ill have been studying as much as this until I
graduate. What about you? Dont you ever study?
Ill have studied by the end of the day. Its easy!
What do you think youll have been doing when you are thirty years old?
Thats difficult to answer but I guess Ill have been working at my own
company, living with family and having a good time.
It sounds great. Hopefully, youll have been doing that! I believe I will
have been living abroad. Thats my long term goal.
I know that and Im sure youll have achieved it within the next five years.
Thanks! Thats the reason why Ive been working so hard and I will have
been doing it until I live my dream.
I can see you have your mind set to it, so Im sure it will happen.
What will you have written to Susie before her birthday party?
Ill have been written good wishes to her in a card I made myself. We all
will have been partying until the sunrise.
Sure thing! Ill have hired a band to play at his house.
Great idea! Shell love it! I have to go now if I want to study today.
Go ahead. You told me youll have studied by the end of the day, so get to
it and after we can do something. Today is Saturday, remember?
Lets Talk:
-
What will have happened to the world by the year 2100?

What will you have been doing when this year finishes?
Where do you think you will have gone when you get ten years older?
What do you believe will have happened to technology by the year 2100?
Page 144
UNIT FOUR Life Changes

SIMPLE PRESENT
Simple Present; Present Progressive

Present perfect; Perfect Progressive
PRESENT PROGRESSIVE
- I usually pay the bill on Mondays.
- Im paying the bill right now.
- Does he always go skiing in winter?
- Is he skiing in Canada all week long?
- Angy is at the supermarket now.
- Angy is going to the supermarket now.
- Susie doesn't like to cook.
- Susie isnt cooking now.
- Theyre often late to the appointments.
- They are leaving right now.
- Eduard and you eat pizza, don't you?
- Youre eating pizza, arent you?
PRESENT PERFECT
PERFECT PROGRESSIVE
- Ive paid every bill since I began to
- Ive been paying every bill since I
work three years ago.
started working three years ago.
- Has he gone skiing this winter?
- Has he been going skiing every winter
- Angys been at the supermarket for
since he was ten years old?
two hours. There must be many people.
- Angys been going to the supermarket
- Youve eaten pizza, havent you?
once every two weeks since last year.

-
Im going horseback riding this afternoon after I finish watching my program.

Frank has bought four cars since he moved here three years ago.
My girlfriend and I usually stay home to watch movies on a Sunday evening.
Susie doesn't like to cook, even though shes doing it right now.
Rossy has gone to Chicago again. Shes been working really hard lately.
I still cant believe you havent told me what youve done!
Do you remember the neighbor? Hes getting married in two months.
Has Angy been doing what I told her? She should reduce her stress levels!
Susie has been taking it easy on the store. She seems relaxer now.
Theyre almost here. Why havent you got ready? Arent you taking a
shower?
Page 145
Dont Forget:
El Simple Present expresa acciones que se realizan a diario, estas

simplemente ocurren en el momento y ya quedan en el pasado.
El Present Progressive indica acciones que han estado ocurriendo por cierto
tiempo. Estas acciones comienzan en el pasado y continan ejecutndose en el
presente de manera recurrente. Este tiempo tambin puede indicar futuro
simple al colocar un momento futuro en el complemento.
El Present Perfect expresa acciones que se han ido realizando desde un
punto en el pasado hasta el presente pero de manera intermitente.
El Perfect Progressive indica acciones que se han ido realizando desde un
punto en el pasado hasta el presente de manera recurrente o continua.
Lets Read:
Eduard:
Susie:
Eduard:
Susie:
Eduard:
Susie:
Eduard:
Susie:
Eduard:
Susie:
Eduard:
Susie:
Eduard:
Susie:
Eduard:
Susie:
Whats up Susie? How are you?

Everythings cool. Theres nothing new. Ive been working and chilling
these days. What about you?
Ive been commuting from place to place. I bought some stuff to sell, so
now I have to go everywhere to charge my clients.
Dont worry. Im sure all your hard work will pay off. Certainly, itll leave
you a lot of profit.
Hope you are right! Im working really hard. Daniel joined me too.
Did he? I havent talked to him in a long time. How is he doing?
He is fine. Hes also been commuting with me everywhere.
How often do you buy new products? What do you get?
We usually buy clothes, technology and perfumes. Thats sold very fast.
So, youre going to compete against my store?
No, we wont because we have two different target markets and customers.
Thats true. Well, I wish you the best of lucks and a lot of success.
Thanks! Good wishes are always well received. How long have you been
paying property taxes on your store?
Ive been paying them since I opened it. If I dont, I would get shut down.
I dont have to pay that because I dont own a place. Thats one heavy
reason to continue being freelance.
It makes sense. I have to go back to work, take care and dont be lazy!
Lets Talk:
-
Would you prefer to work for a company or to be freelance?

What has been your favorite job and why?
How old were you when you got your first job? What were you doing?
What are your priorities when making a budget? Whats first and last?
Page 146
RADIO REPORT PRACTICE

Understanding people speaking on the radio is often more difficult than
understanding movies or the TV because you cannot use gesture, expressions and
other non-verbal cues to help you. For this reason, listening to the radio is excellent
practice! Chicago Public Radio, YouTube or Podcast Web Pages are great source of
information, intelligent news reporting and stories of general interest.
Your assignment is to chose a topic and listen to fifteen minutes of radio
broadcasting, takes notes while you listen, then, summarize what you heard and give
your opinion about it. Your opinion should be, at least, two paragraphs. You can
write additional questions that you may have, or new vocabulary. Use the blank space
below to write. Be prepared to share your reports with the class!
Go to: - www.npr.org
- www.youtube.com
Page 147
UNIT FIVE How did it go?

SIMPLE PAST
Simple Past; Past Progressive

Past perfect; Perfect Progressive
PAST PROGRESSIVE
- I usually paid the bill on Mondays.
- I was paying the bill yesterday.
- Did he always go skiing in winter?
- Was he skiing in Canada last week?
- Angy was at the supermarket with us.
- Angy was going to the supermarket.
- Susie didn't like to cook.
- Susie wasnt cooking an hour ago.
- They were late to the appointments.
- They were leaving three days ago.
- Eduard and you ate pizza, didn't you?
- You were eating pizza, werent you?
PAST PERFECT
PERFECT PROGRESSIVE
- Id paid every bill before I began to
- Id been paying every bill before I
work three years ago.
started working three years ago.
- Had he gone skiing last winter?
- Had he been going skiing every winter
- Angy had been at the supermarket for
before he was ten years old?
two hours before she cooked.
- Angy had been going to the
- Youd eaten pizza before, hadnt you?
supermarket before I did.

-
I flew to Australia last year to take a look at the wild life.

Frank is really looking forward to becoming a professional soon.
He had taken that picture before you told him. He wanted to be a surprise.
Susie was leaving earlier today to open her store but her alarm didn't go off.
Eduard had been smoking four cigars before he went into classes.
Angy told me we were going out tonight but she canceled a few minutes ago.
Susie said she had argued with her partner before she fired him.
I wanted to get a new job for a while because I hadnt got promoted yet.
These books were written by the director of the course.
Angy was worried because she heard that the date of her exam was change.
Page 148
Dont Forget:
El Simple Past expresa una accin simple que ya se realiz por una vez en
algn punto en el pasado.
El Past Progressive indica una accin que comenz en el pasado, termino en
el pasado y se realiz por ese periodo de tiempo de manera continua.
El Past Perfect expresa un pasado ms lejano que el pasado simple, es decir,
una accin que se realiz primero que otra tambin en el pasado en la lnea de
tiempo.
El Past Perfect Progressive indica que una accin se realiz de manera
recurrente hasta un punto en el pasado antes que comenzara otra accin que
tambin termino en el pasado.
A estas estructuras es posible agregarles adverbios de tiempo como always,
usually, sometimes, never.
Lets Read:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Did you finish doing all your homework? Are you done studying?
Im finally done. I havent had free time for a long time. It feels really good
to know that you dont have anything to do.
I know! Well, lets get into something funny! What do you want to do?
Can you believe that I have no idea? I am always used to study all the time.
Those times are over because vacations are getting closer. Did you usually
go to the movies when you were in high school?
Yes, I did. When I went there, I had already finished all my duties.
Just like now. Well go to the movies tonight! I was peeling oranges to
make some juice but I ended up eating them
Thats so uncommon on you! NOT!
Thats not funny well, it is a little funny. I do eat a lot.
Anyways, had you been aware of the danger of the flu epidemic nowadays
before you flew abroad? You could have got it but thanks God you didnt.
No, I hadnt been aware of it before I flew, otherwise, I wouldnt have
done it. The virus has been spreading very quickly.
It has spread very fast. Its almost in every country. Its scary!
We have to take care of ourselves and be careful where we go and what we
touch. Its extremely contagious!
Youre right but Im sure Scientifics will develop a cure real soon.
Hope you are right. Its like a terror movie.
Lets Talk:
-
What had you planned to study before you began English?

Why were you thinking about studying English before you started?
What you think its best to know: English, Mandarin or French? Explain.
Page 149
UNIT SIX Is that what I think it is?

Defining and Non-defining relative

clauses.
Defining Relative Clauses

The nurse who delivered her baby was very attentive.
Clowns who make you laugh should get paid better.
The computer which is very expensive is the one I need.
The beach where I went last year was very beautiful.
My partner whose car was stolen is very disappointed.
The time when you left was the right one.
Your boss whom you hate is quitting soon.
Where are the movies (that) I rented yesterday?
Defining
Relative
Clasuses da informacin
esencial para definir e
identificar al sujeto del
que estamos hablando.
Non - Defining Relative Clauses

Clowns, who are sometimes scary, have wigs and make up.
My partner, whom is 40 years old, is a good business man.
My car, which my sister gave to me, is very reliable.
Lake Michigan, where Angy and Susie were last year, is pretty.
Their friends, whose phones are Blackberries, are wealthy.
Susies store, which is near her house, is selling more than ever.
The place was full of people, many of whom Id already met.
Non - Defining
Relative Clasuses da
informacin extra,
no esencial del
sujeto que no ayuda
a identificarlo.

-
I knew her grandmother, who is dead now. She was loved by all of us.
He will be carrying her bags, many of which are very heavy.
Frank, who is dark hair and dark complexion, is intelligent and hard working.
Rosy, who used to be blonde, is a brunette. I think she looks better now.
My father, whose car he lets me borrow, is very cautious
Shes studying math, which subject shes about to flunk.
Those books that you have in your shelf were very useful to me.
Nothing that anyone does can change what I feel. Only time will tell.
People whose houses with roofs full of leaks are usually located in slums.
Florida, where the sun always shines, gathers many different cultures.
Cast away has been the best movie that Ive ever seen.
Page 150
Dont Forget:
Defining Relative Clauses dan informacin necesaria para poder identificar

el sujeto del que se est hablando, claro est que para su uso el sujeto debe ser
indefinido.
En estas oraciones, el sujeto y el conectivo para definir van unidos sin coma.
En las Defining Relative Clauses, se puede omitir el conectivo cuando las
dos partes de la oracin sean objetos relacionados directamente.
Non Defining Relative Clauses dan informacin que no es esencial, esta
es extra y dice ms sobre el sujeto del que se habla pero no ayuda a
identificarlo.
En estas oraciones, las clausulas estn separadas del resto de la oracin por
comas.
Lets Read:
Frank:
Eduard:
Frank:
Eduard:
Frank:
Eduard:
Frank:
Eduard:
Frank:
Eduard:
Frank:
Eduard:
Frank:
Eduard:
How are you doing Eduard? Are you dating the girl who you went with to
Angys meeting?
No, we arent dating. Do you remember the girl I met by the beach?
Do you mean the beach where we are used to hanging out every week?
Yes, that same beach. Do you remember we met her when playing volley?
I do remember now after that exact explanation. Whats up with her?
Weve been dating for three weeks. She, whose car I love, also owns a
house on the mountains to which weve been invited to go next month.
How about that!? I didnt see that one coming. Im up to it. Have you told
the other guys about our next trip?
The guys, who I havent seen for a while, are going to be surprised. They
love these unplanned trips which weve taken several times.
I know. Its going to be great news when they find out.
The place were going, where people usually go hiking and shower in
rivers, is a direct contact with nature, where smoking is not allowed.
I guess thats going to be hard for you, isnt it?
No, its not! I quit smoking when the doctor told me I was in danger.
Thats an intelligent decision. Cigars, many of which Id smoked before I
went to the doctor, are bad for health and cause lung cancer.
The doctor, who has been a friend of mine for a long time, told me the
same thing when I went, so he scared me out. Anyway, dont say anything.
Lets Talk:
-
Have you dated a person who you didn't like at first? Whats the story?
What do you think people who smoke should do? Why?
What has been the place where youve had the greatest time? Why?
What do you do nowadays when you are stressed out?
Have you met somebody whose house had been broken into?
Page 151
UNIT SEVEN Anything else I should know?

Indefinite Pronouns with else.

Whether or not.
Indefinite Pronouns
Singular
Plural
Another,
anybody,
anyone,
anything, each, either, everybody,
everyone, everything,
little,
much, neither, nobody, no one,
nothing, one, other, somebody,
someone, something.
Any
Some
No
Every
body
+ thing
one
ELSE
Both
Few
Many
Others
Several
Singular &
Plural
All
Any
More
Most
None, some
Hacen referencia
a
algo
no
identificado o no
especificado.
Pronombres indefinidos
que hacen referencia al
resto de lo que se est
hablando.
- Both of you are grounded for your words. Does anybody else have something to
say?
- Each of us brought something for the party. Most of the guests bought booze.
- Everybody left town for the weekend to go to the Green Peace concert in the
country.
Whether or not
- I wanted to ask you whether or not you could come today?

- Frank isnt sure whether or not taking the train tomorrow!
- Can you tell me whether or not we are going to play tennis?
- Will you travel whether or not I stay here?

-
Frank said what he felt, so, does anybody else have something to say?
Someone is standing at the door knocking and nobody opens it.
Do you know whether Susie is closing the store early today?
Everything you do is wrong and nobody corrects you. Somebody has to do it.
All the people who came today are here to learn some entrepreneurship tools.
Do you know whether most of you will get picked by the principal?
Page 152
Dont Forget:
Los Indefinite Pronouns se refieren a algo que no est definido o especifico.

Cuando se complementa el pronombre con one, body este hace referencia a
personas, si se complemente con thing, hace referencia a cosas o animales.
Al utilizar un Indefinite Pronoun este se convierte en el sujeto, por lo que
hay q tener en cuenta si es singular, plural y el gnero al formular la oracin.
Si se utiliza un Indefinite Pronoun que comience con no-, es indebido
usar otra negacin en la misma clausula.
Los siguientes son pronombres indefinidos para lugares: somewhere,
anywhere, nowhere, everywhere.
Como significado literal: some, algn; any, ningn; no, ningn; every,
cada. Ejemplo: Everyone is here Cada uno est aqu / Todos estn aqu.
Whether or not es similiar a if, estos pueden ser intercambiables aunque
este condicional no es de uso comn.
Lets Read:
Frank:
Eduard:
Frank:
Eduard:
Frank:
Eduard:
Frank:
Eduard:
Frank:
Eduard:
Frank:
Eduard:
Frank:
Eduard:
Frank:
Dont worry. Nobody will find out about the trip until you tell them. Both
of us should remain easy going when seeing them.
Are you going to meet with them whether it rains or not?
Yes, I will. Weve made a plan of hunting some deer and rabbits.
Thats something Ive never done! Would you mind if I go?
You can surely come with us! Do you know anybody else who would like
to come too? That way, we can all chip in and things will get cheaper.
Most of my friends dont like shooting. Theyre peaceful.
Well, you can tell them. All are welcome to come hunting. Everything is
already taken care of for this trip. Only a few has visited the place well go.
What are we going to take as food? I suggest each of us gets one vote.
I agree. All of us will vote to create the menu. Well have to put it in a safe
place. It rained last time, so all of it was soaked.
After its made, Ill ask if everyone is happy with his menu.
Thats ok. Were done! Hey, did you feel awkward when Susie was
crying? I did, she did something wrong but she regretted it.
I didnt feel anything. She was crying because she did something she knew
it was wrong. Ive always said not to cry over the spilled milk.
You have a point, but it seems heartless to me. Dont be so harsh on her.
I dont mean to be cruel but thats the only way shell change.
Lets Talk:
-
Do you think everything you do is done correctly, right place and right time?
Why is everybody else on this world acting crazy? Whats going on?
Will you whether or not vote for the next elections? Why will you?
Page 153
UNIT EIGHT One word is not enough

Vocabulary acquisition.
Agreement and Disagreement

- To see eye to eye: to agree completely.
- To go along with: to conform.
- To be on the same wavelength: to be thinking exactly the same thing.
- To side with: to support or favor another person.
- You can say that again!: to completely agree with what one said.
- To be for: to be in favor, to support.
- To be at odds with: to be in conflict with.
- War of words: a continual spoken or written exchange between opposing sites.
Tolerance and Frustration

- To put up with: to tolerate or accept unwillingly.
- To be fed up with: to be unable to accept any longer.
- To put an end to: to eliminate, to abolish.
- The last straw: the final action another person does that cannot be ignored.
- To draw the line: to establish a certain limit at.
- To be at the end of ones rope: feeling frustrated and not knowing what to do.
- To pull ones hair over: to remain upset about a frustrating situation.
- To beat ones head against the wall: to be completely frustrated in ones efforts.
Expressing Oneself
- To speak ones mind: to express ones ideas or opinions.
- To fire away: to ask whatever questions one wants.
- To blurt out: to express an idea or feeling without thought.
- To have a way with words: to express oneself well, to communicate effectively.
- To beat around the bush: to not deal directly with a problem.
- To clam up: to suddenly refuse to speak.
- To shut up: to stop talking.
- To hold down: to talk more softly.
- The cat has ones tongue: to be unable to speak, not to know what to say.
Page 154
Check Point:
Go through unit one to unit seven, one by one, and talk about the topics of each unit
with your classmates and the teacher. Don't forget to speak your mind and fire away
any kind of question you may have.
Lets Practice
Write your opinion about some issue or problem that youve had recently. Be
prepared to discuss it in class after you finish.
Page 155

information, intelligent news reports and stories of general interest.
- www.youtube.com
Page 156
UNIT NINE If only

Review of Conditionals Type A, B, C, D

Purpose Clauses.
Conditionals Type A, B, C, D
TIPO A
TIPO B
TIPO C
TIPO D
Purpose Clauses
Frank wakes up early in order to go to work on time.
Frank wakes up early so that he can go to work on time.
Susie will take her car to the mechanic for an oil change.
Shell take her car to the mechanic to have the oil changed.
In order to + Verb
So (that) + Clause
For + Noun
To + Verb
Indica el resultado o
consecuencia
de
una
accin a travs de un
conectivo.
Conectivos utilizados para introducir

las clausulas de resultado.

-
I think Angy wouldve screamed louder if she hadnt had ice cream last night.
I ran as fast as I could in order to get away from the thief but I hit him first.
Eduard is having a garage sale to get rid of some things he doesn't use.
Susie would break into her store if she forgot the keys. She doesn't miss a day.
Frank went out last night so he ran out of money to pay the bills.
If I don't get too lazy tomorrow morning, well meet to play tennis.
We all usually go to the lake on weekends just for fun and fishing.
Unless time is almost over, I don't work. I like working under pressure.
Page 157
Dont Forget:
Los condicionales indican el resultado de una accin al esta llevarse a cabo, es

decir, si la condicin se cumple, el resultado tambin.
El condicional Tipo A es real, es decir, si se cumple la condicin, el resultado
siempre ser cierto. Los Tipo B expresan una posibilidad de que ocurra algo
en el futuro dado una accin en el presente. Los Tipo C expresan un presente
hipottico y los Tipo D indican un pasado irreal, es decir, algo que pudo haber
pasado dado la condicin.
Purpose Clauses introduce el resultado de una accin hecha. Se usan cuando
se quiere establecer el propsito de la accin en una clausula independiente.
No olvidar establecer la diferencia entre los Conditional Clauses, Time
Clauses and Purpose Clauses.
Lets Read:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Susie:
Angy:
Angy, I had forgotten to ask you this yesterday before I left, so Ill do it
now before I forget again. Did you make the passport appointment?
Did you make that entire introduction just to ask me that? I was already
getting scared. I made the appointment two days ago. Its due to next week.
You know how talkative I am. Dont you have all the documents yet?
Of course. I needed them in order to make the appointment. What kind of
question is that?
I asked because I didnt know. If I had, I wouldnt have talked to you.
Ok. Dont be at odds with me. Have you worked out lately to lose weight?
Yes, Ive been going to the gym for a good amount of exercise.
When did you start? If you had told me the start date, I wouldve signed in
with you. I also need to start an exercise routine.
Dont be such a liar. You know that if I had told you to join me, youd have
made something up to not do it. Youre lazy so thats what I expect.
Dont be so mean. Youre hurting my feelings but I guess youre right. I
need someone to push me in order to exercise. Would you be that person?
Ill help you if you promise that youll get me a passport appointment!
I can surely tell you that Ill do my best to get you one but you know how
difficult it is. Can you go along with that?
Ok, I guess we see eye to eye now. Ill wake you up at five to go for a run.
Are you kidding me? But ok, if you are there with me, I can do it!
Lets Talk:
- What do you usually do in order to get and stay in shape?
- If you had to stay in a desert island, what would you take with you and why?
- What would you do today if you knew that you will get kidnapped tomorrow?
Page 158
UNIT TEN On the phone.

Review of Reported Speech.

Using imperative.
Reported Speech
Direct Style
- I said, Im going to fail the test.

- She said, Rosy cried after what you did.
- The principal said, You are all expelled.
- My mom said, Go clean your room now.
- I said, Don't you speak English?
- What did she say?
She said she would buy us lunch today.
-What did they say?
They said you were a liar and a hypocrite
but I said that they were wrong.
Indirect Style
- What is she going to tell you tomorrow?
She will tell me a secret; I hope she wont tell lies.
- What have Susie told you?
Shed told me she liked me before she hugged me.
I told you so. I said she was in love with you.
Imperatives
- I said, Don't do it. Didn't you listen to me? I told you not to run with scissors.
- Susie told you to close the store early. Why couldn't you do it?
- Frank said, Stop doing that. He didn't tell you to continue! He told you to quit it.

-
Did Eduard ask me to join him in a morning run? Tell him I will sleep late.
He said, I live in the U.S. He said that he lived in the U.S.
She said, Im watching TV She said she was watching TV.
They said, Were going to eat they said they were going to eat.
He said, I will phone her tonight he said he would phone her tonight.
He said, Ive visited Chicago once He said he had visited Chicago once.
She said, I had breakfast this morning She said she had had breakfast.
He said, I had already bought it He said he had already bought it.
Page 159
Don't Forget:
El Reported Speech expresa lo dicho por otra persona y puede ser de dos
maneras, el estilo directo o el estilo indirecto.
El estilo directo reporta exactamente lo que la persona dijo, por lo que se
utiliza el verbo say usualmente en pasado y lo que dijo entre comillas.
El estilo indirecto es el ms usado y expresa lo que dijo la persona sin utilizar
las mismas palabras, por lo que los tiempos verbales deben ser cambiados
para tener la concordancia de tiempos (unit 15) como se muestra en la pgina
anterior en la parte Look for the grammar in the sentences below.
El verbo say se utiliza para hacer preguntas y respuestas generales, es decir,
no estn dirigidas a una persona en especfico. Este verbo siempre est
seguido de lo que se reporta.
El verbo tell se utiliza para hacer preguntas y respuestas a una o varias
personas especificas. Este verbo siempre est seguido de un sujeto o
pronombre objetivo, excepto cuando se dice tell lies / tell a story.
El conectivo that es opcional, es decir, no es obligatorio colocarlo en
ninguna estructura.
Lets read:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Angy:
Frank:
Hello Frank. Are you there? I cant hear you.

Im here Angy but neither can I. Whats wrong?
What did you say? I didnt get it, anyways, Ill hang up and Ill call you
again. Is that ok?
I told you that I couldnt hear you either. Sure, lets try that. Hope it works.
What about now Frank? Is this better?
What did you tell me? I wasnt paying attention.
I said, What about now Frank. Listen to me while I talk. I wanted to tell
you that we will all meet tonight. Would you like to go?
Yes, I would like to go. Its been a long time since we all hung out. What
did the other guys tell you? Are they going?
They told me they would go if they had enough time. They said they would
do everything they could to be able to make it.
Im sure theyll make it. We always have time for each other. Tell them I
told you I said that.
Dont worry, I will! Have you spoken to Susie about our business idea?
We wont talk about that on the phone. Well have a meeting later to cut
down to business. I have to go now. Always nice talking to you!
Lets Talk:
- Why do you usually call a person for? Do you prefer sending text messages?
- Do you get mad when people don't understand you and ask to repeat what you said?
- Are you afraid of talking in front of a big crowd? Why is that?
Page 160
SPECIAL PRACTICE One word is not enough

Parts of a Book
- Acknowledgments
- Contents
- Explanatory notes
- Preface
- Appendix
- Copyright
- Footnote
- Text
- Bibliography
- Dedication
- Index
- Title
Types of Books
- Almanac
- Booklet
- Dictionary
- Magazine
- Pamphlet
- Best seller
- Brochure
- Encyclopedia
- Novel
- Picture book
- Book
- Comic book
- Hardcover
- Periodical
- Textbook
Newspaper
- Advertisement
- Cartoon
- Comics
- Editorial
- Feature
- Interviewer
- Newspaper office
- Obituary
- Tabloid
- Advice column
- Circulation
- Correspondent
- Evening edition
- Front page
- Lead story
- Newsprint
- Photographer
- TV guide
- Back page
- Columnist
- Editor
- Extra
- Headline
- Morning edition
- Newsstand
- Reporter
Party Names
- Barbecue party
- Cocktail party
- Wedding party
- Office party
- Birthday party
- Going away party
- Anniversary party - Welcome Party

- Dinner party
- Fancy dress party
- Halloween party
- Christmas party
- Goodbye party
- Mother's Day party
- Fathers day party
Page 161
Lets Talk: Why we are here and what do we want to do?

Think about these questions, write your own answers and then discuss them in class.
- Why do you want to improve your English?
- What activities can best help you improve your English?
- What things can you do inside the classroom to best help yourself with your
English?
- What things can you do outside to best help you?
- How important is the course / the teacher / the book in your learning process?
- Is it important for you to prepare for a lesson? How can you do it?
- What is the perfect lesson?
Does it exist?
What should there definitely be in a lesson?
Is there anything there shouldn't be in a lesson?
- What characteristics do you look for in a teacher?

- What benefits would bring you the fact of knowing English?
- What other language would you like to learn?
- Do you look for practicing and being surrounded by English outside the classroom?
- After you learn English, what country would you like to go to continue your
studies?
- What has been the most interesting fact about the English language to you?
- What do you like the most, reading, talking, listening or writing?
- What do you think would happen with your daily life after you learn English?
- Which one do you think is more important, English or Mandarin? Why?
- Is English involved in your career?
- Does any other person of your family speak English?
- If the answer is yes. Do you usually practice with him/her?
- Did somebody encourage you to start studying English? Who did it and why?
- What do you expect when you finish this course?
Page 162
UNIT ELEVEN Was that done by you?

Review of Passive Voice.

Connectives: although, in spite of, despite
of, however.
Passive Voice
Object + To be (any tense) + Verb (past participle) + Comp.
Object + Aux. + To be + Verb (past participle) + Comp.
Active Voice
- Frank writes a new book.
- Frank wrote a new book.
- Frank will write a new book.
- Franks writing a new book.
- Frank was writing a new book.
- Frank has written a new book.
- Frank had written a new book.
- Frank should write a new book.
- Frank could write a new book.
- Frank must write a new book.
Passive Voice

- A new book is written.

(Present)
- A new book was written.
(Past)
- A new book will be written.
(Future)
- A new book is being written.
(Prog.)
- A new book was being written. (Prog.)
- A new book has been written. (Perfect)
- A new book had been written. (Perfect)
- A new book should be written.
- A new book could be written.
- A new book must be written.
- Frank will play tennis tomorrow although hes been working out today.
- Thats a very good car, however I believe its too expensive.
Connectives - Despite of her car accident, your sister will still run the marathon.
- In spite of my trip to New York, I won't be able to attend your party.

-
My little neighbor is very sad because his bike was stolen from the back yard.
This wont work because a mistake was made at the beginning.
Despite of the fact youre late, I will begin my presentation now.
Although Im not too popular, a letter was send to me by a cheerleader.
Houses are supposed to be built by the government, however its uncommon.
Over fifteen millions books have been written, however it hasnt been enough.
In spite of our hard work, a $10,000 bonus will be given to us.
The football game will be watched by us at eight 0clock. Don't be late.
Page 163
Don't Forget:
Voz Pasiva o Passive Voice es de uso comn en el ingls, tanto formal

como informal y para que se pueda estructurar, la oracin debe contar con un
objeto directo o indirecto, ya que est ser el sujeto.
Se puede utilizar en cualquier tiempo, conjugando el verbo to be de la
manera adecuada y agregando el auxiliar correspondiente. Los tiempos
utilizados en la voz pasiva estn en la pgina anterior.
Al introducir un verbo modal en el Passive Voice, el verbo to be quedar
en infinitivo. El tiempo progresivo requiere un primer verbo to be
conjugado en el tiempo deseado, y un segundo being para crear el
progresivo, ms el verbo en pasado participio.
Los conectivos se utilizan para conectar ideas o prrafos. Estos expresan cada
uno diferentes puntos de vista, por lo que se debe estar claro en el orden de
ideas.
Lets read:
Rossy:
Susie:
Rossy:
Susie:
Rossy:
Susie:
Rossy:
Susie:
Rossy:
Susie:
Rossy:
Susie:
Rossy:
Susie:
Rossy:
Susie, your store has been doing very well. Everything that you put on sell
has been sold very fast. Profit has been increased three times as much.
Ive realized that. Many thanks have been given to my manager.
Luckily for him, it hasnt been only compliments, but also payments.
Of course, money was given to him for the job that was made by him. He
deserved that and more if he continues to work.
Thats great! All your work is being awarded through many sales.
Im happy about that but lets change our conversation. I dont like to brag
about my success.
Its not bragging when I ask. Compliments were given by me.
Anyways, why hasnt your business idea been developed yet?
I dont think it is good enough. This has been done by many people so the
competition is too tough. Something else will be created by me.
Im sure about that but just dont let it get too late.
Ill try to do that. What happened with your relationship? Did you guys
break up? What about the letters you showed me?
Yes, we broke up about two weeks ago but I havent told anything to
anyone until now. The letters were torn up by him in front of me.
It doesnt sound pretty. Well, hope you guys dont end up in bad terms.
Conversations about the issue have taken place and weve end up as
friends. Hope that last.
Friendship is whats left in our life.
Lets Talk:
-
What do you believe its more important, keeping a friend or a relationship?

Has your work been done correctly by you lately? What have you done?
What do you think about people who brag about everything?
Page 164
UNIT TWELVE Connecting ideas

Expressions of Purpose.
Connectives
Rules
- Ive got a new job in order to move on with my life.

- Ive got a new job so that I can move on with my life.
- Ive got a new job to move on with my life.
- Ive got a new job for moving on with my life.
- Ive got a new job in case I lose my gigs.
In order to
So that
To
For
In case (of)
+
+
+
+
+
Verb (base form)

Subject
Verb (base form)
Verb (progressive)
Subject
Check Point: Connect the two different parts.

She left early today
Frank is working long hours
Well wear hiking boots today
Angy is studying really hard
Susie needed to choose wisely
He didn't smoke any more
It hasn't begun to fly yet
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
a. so that she is able to get a good grade.

b. in case of a broken engine.
c. so that she would be on time.
d. to make some extra money.
e. for making the right decision.
f. in case it rains.
g. in order to get healthier.

-
He was mixing red wine with meat in order to make a good lunch.
Angy asked the teacher to give her another chance so that she would do better.
Why don't you take one of your friends to have a lovely dinner?
He should start finding age appropriate people in case police comes.
Susie installed recording cams for watching her employees at work hours.
Don't even think about changing the channel so that we don't miss anything.
Go to the web page I gave you in case you forget what I told you.
Im just getting in for having a long nap before the party of last night.
Page 165
Don't Forget:
La funcin de las Expressions of Purpose es conectar dos ideas que se

relacionan como causa y consecuencia.
In order to y to; va seguido del vero en forma base. So that y in case
of va seguido del sujeto ms verbo ms complemento. For va seguido del
verbo en progresivo, es decir, con ing.
En la mayora de los casos, estos conectivos pueden ser colocados todos en
una misma oracin, pero el significado varia significativamente, por lo que es
necesario aprender las diferencias de cada uno en contexto.
Lets read:
Frank:
Hey Eduard. How is it going? Are you ready for partying tonight?
Eduard: Not yet. Its still too early. Have you already gone to get Angys dress?
Frank:
Oh my god! I forgot and I wouldnt do it if you didnt remind me. Do you
think it is for tonight? Shes beautiful so she really doesnt need it.
Eduard: It sounds to me you dont want to pick it up. You need to leave now in
order to make it on time to the party. Go and hurry up.
Frank:
You are right. I cant be lazy with this. I have to do it to make her happy.
Ill take an umbrella with me in case it rains.
Eduard: Hold on to that thought. Go now and be careful because youre in a rush.
Greet Rossy before you leave.
Rossy:
Where is Frank going so quickly? Will he go to his house for dressing up?
Eduard: Hes in a rush in order to make it on time after picking up Angys dress and
getting ready. I couldnt help to laugh when he told me he had forgotten.
Rossy:
Thats funny. Well, good luck to him. Are you taking something to the
party? We agreed wed all chip in to make it better.
Eduard: Of course Im contributing. The idea was given by me so that I must
participate. When are you leaving to get dressed up?
Rossy:
Im already dressed up! Dont I look nice? Ill leave for changing my dress.
Eduard: Its not necessary for you to leave. I was just kidding. You look great!
Rossy:
Of course! You were joking, werent you? Because if you werent, I would
leave faster than Frank so that I could change everything I was wearing.
Eduard: You dont need to look at your wardrobe again. Youre beautiful, so relax.
Rossy:
I wanted to wait for Frank in case he lost the address but its too late now
and we need to go. Well call him on the way to verify the address.
Eduard: Well thought. Lets go now.
Lets Talk:
-
What do you do with your last minute activities so that you have them done?
When something that needed to be done wasn't done, what do you do?
Do you have a schedule in order to make all your appointments happen?
When was the last time you missed an appointment? What happened?
Page 166

- www.youtube.com
Page 167
UNIT THIRTEEN Can you do that?

Asking Permission
Asking permission.
Can I ask you a question?

May I have a ?
Could I get you to ?
Is it ok if ?
Would you mind if ?
Would it be alright if ?
Do you mind if ?
Will you be ok with?
Is it possible to?
Possible Answers
Affirmative:
- Sure.
- Certainly.
- No problem.
- Go ahead.
- Its ok.
- Its up to you.
- I don't mind.
- Just do it.
Negative:
- Of course not.
- Can't do!
- No way.
- Forget it!
- Are you kidding me?
- Thats not possible.

-
May I have a cup of coffee please? I would love that very much.
Do you mind if I smoke here right now? I actually do mind.
Is it ok if she joins me tomorrow? Thats no problem!
Could I get you to quit your job? Thats making you unhappy.
Can I ask you a question? Certainly! What is it?
Would it be alright if I eat the last pizza slice? Go ahead.
Would it be alright to leave now? Are you kidding me?
Can I tell you something? Sure, just do it!
Will you be ok with me going away on vacation for a whole week?
Could I get you to fly with me to the congress? Thats not possible!
Do you mind if we don't pay you back? No way, forget it!
Is it possible for you to go swimming to a key? Sorry, cant do!
Is it alright for me to take a nap now? Im tired! Sure, I don't need you more.
Page 168
Don't Forget:
Asking for Permission es la primera Social Skill o Habilidad Social que

se estudiar en el presente libro y cuya funcin es desarrollar las estrategias
que se poseen para tener una buena fluidez en el contexto social.
Dentro de la cultura Americana, el ser cortez y educado al momento de pedir
por algo puede hacer la diferencia entre una respuesta afirmativa o negativa
Al colocar alguna pregunta de las mostradas arriba, esta quedar estructurada
como una Indirect Question por lo que se le aplican las mismas reglas.
Utilizar estas estructuras en todo momento y en cualquier contexto lo
convierte en una persona con un uso educado del Ingls.
Lets read:
Asking Permission is a Social Skill. When you need to get permission from someone,
you should:
1. Look at the other person.
2. Be specific when you ask permission. The other person should know exactly
what you are requesting.
3. Be sure to ask rather than demand. May I please ?
4. Give reasons if necessary.
5. Accept the decision.
The reasons to use the skill is because its important to ask permission whenever you
want to do something or use something that another person is responsible for. Asking
permission shows your respect for others and increases the chances that your request
will be granted.
It is always wise to ask permission to use something that doesnt belong to you. It
doesnt matter if it is a pencil or someones bike. Ask permission!
Sometimes, you wont get what you want. But if you have asked permission politely
and correctly, you are more likely to get what you want the next time.
Think about how you would feel if someone used something of yours without asking
first. Besides feeling that the person was not polite and did not respect your property,
you would be worried that the item might get broken or lost.
Lets Talk:
-
What do you usually do in order to get someone lend you something?

Do you take no for answer when borrowing something?
What do you think its the most impolite answer to a request or petition?
What characteristics do you look for in order to lend something of yours?
Page 169
UNIT FOURTEEN Just make do with it!

Indirect Ideas. Tag Questions.

Comparatives and Superlatives.
Indirect Ideas
- Would you happen to know what he is doing now?

- Can you tell me where your daughter was yesterday?
- Do you know whether or not hes been working hard?
- Is it possible for you to tell me if youll come on time?
- I wonder if Angy studied enough for her final test.
Tag Questions
- He is at his house right now, isnt he?

- Susie flew to Paris last year, didn't she?
- Frank and Angy wont `require any information to join, will you?
- Weve swore we wont do that anymore, havent we?
- You hadnt gone to her house before you came to mine, had you?
- He is more talented on T.V. than on stage.

- Im sorry to tell you that she isnt as honest as your last partner.
Comparatives - My room is always cleaner than my sisters. She is a mess.
& Superlatives - Hes more handsome than a T.V. actor. I like him a lot.
- Angy is sometimes the laziest person I know. That bothers me.
- Our sons are always the most energetic participants at school.
- Hes the best in gymnastics but the worst in Spanish class.

-
Can you tell me if you are more curious about the trip than her?
We need a longer rope to be able to attach both car ends, don't we?
You used to kick the ball softer than he did, didn't you?
My parents have prayed during Easter for 20 years. I don't think theyll stop.
Why are you the angriest person here? Nobody has done anything to you!
The top seats are more comfortable than the lower ones.
Buy those speakers. Theyre the loudest in here. Its what you need, isnt it?
Do you know what the easiest way of skipping a step without trouble is?
Hed harmed his hostage worse before he did to you. Hes the most
dangerous.
Page 170
Don't Forget:
Indirect Questions son ideas ms formales de preguntas normales que se

forman al colocar una pregunta educada delante de la oracin directa.
Como la primera parte de la idea indirecta ya identifica que es una pregunta,
el resto de la oracin debe estar estructurada como si fuese oracin afirmativa.
La funcion del Tag Question es confirmar o negar la informacin de la
oracin dicha. Es el equivalente al verdad? o al no? en espaol.
Los Tag Questions utilizan siempre un auxiliar que debe estar acorde al
tiempo y la estructura de la oracin en forma de pregunta, es decir, auxiliar +
sujeto. Con oraciones afirmativas se coloca el Tag Question en negativo.
Con oraciones negativas se coloca el Tag Question en afirmativo.
Los comparativos y superlativos indican la superioridad con respecto a algn
adjetivo, es decir, ms de alguna cualidad y se forman de acuerdo a la
cantidad de silabas que posea el adjetivo (unit 28 29, Book I).
Lets read:
How to Lose $3 Million in Six Years
Stop us if this sounds familiar: A very lucky person wins the lottery and expects life
to change for the better, but instead, things go horribly wrong. It's a story as old as the
hills, but each time it happens, it causes a huge commotion in Search. The latest
"victim" of sudden wealth is a young woman from the U.K. who won millions of
bucks several years ago, only to lose the vast majority of it shortly thereafter.
Callie Rogers was just 16 when she won a whopping $3 million in the lottery. Six
years later, she reports that she blew untold sums on drugs, partying, exotic cars, and
breast implants. A staggering $730,000 went to designer clothes alone, Ms. Rogers
explains in an article from AOL. Says Rogers: "I honestly wish I'd never won the
lottery money and knowing what I know now I should have just given it all back
to them." She's currently left with around $32,000.
In these trying economic times, Ms. Rogers will likely find little sympathy. Still, it's
worth noting that she's hardly the first big winner who wished she'd never bought a
ticket. There are numerous cases of lotto winners getting divorced due to stress and
losing everything from poor investments. A few have even died at the hands of
greedy relatives.
Knowing she's not the first jackpot winner to suffer hardship won't make her life any
easier. But perhaps Ms. Rogers can take some comfort from the fact that there are
others out there with eerily similar stories: They won big then lost big, and
often wish they'd never even played.
Lets Talk: - What would you do if you won the lottery?
Page 171
UNIT FIFTEEN Smalltalk!

Small Talk: how to begin, maintain
and finish a conversation properly.
Lets Study this Social Skill:
Usada comnmente para romper el hielo

antes de iniciar una conversacin o para evitar
un momento incomodo o embarazoso.
Small Talk
Appropriate
Discussion
Topics
- The weather
- Sports
- Music
- Food
- Traffic
Not appropriate
- Current events
- News
- Common situations
- Celebrities
- Salaries
- Divorces
- Criticism to oneself
- Criticism to others
- Private issues
- Personal information
- Controversies
- Religion
- Politics
To Begin Smalltalk
To Maintain Smalltalk
To Finish Smalltalk
- Ask general questions

about an appropriate topic.
- Continue with general

and
using
indirect
questions.
- Always give compliments

and be polite.
- Use indirect questions as

a line opener.
- Chose wisely the moment
and the place to start, so
that you aren't rude.
- Do not treat the person

with too much confidence.
- Use an appropriate
vocabulary. Do not curse.
- Give ending ideas as a

conclusion warning.
- Chose wisely the moment
so that you aren't rude.
Page 172
Look for the grammar in the sentences below: Conversation starters

-
Can you believe all of this rain we've been having?

How about this weather? We couldn't ask for a nicer day, could we?
Its snowing too much. It sure would be nice to be in Hawaii right about now.
Did you catch the news today? I left early, so I missed it.
I heard on the radio today that they will finally start building the new bridge.
I can't believe how busy we are today, can you?
It looks like we are going to be here a while, don't you think?
Lets Read
In most English-speaking countries, it is normal and necessary to make small talk in
certain situations. Small talk is a casual form of conversation that breaks the ice or
fills an awkward silence between people. Even though you may feel shy using your
second language, it is sometimes considered rude to say nothing. Just as there are
certain times when small talk is appropriate, there are also certain topics that people
often discuss during these moments and others that are inappropriate. Some of them
are listed in this unit.
The hardest part about making small talk is knowing how to start a conversation but
there are some conversation starters you can use to begin it. Remember to always be
polite and to decide talking about a safe commonly known topic.
Therefore, people with many different relationships use small talk. The most common
type of people to use small talk are those who do not know each other at all. Other
people who have short casual conversations are office employees who may not be
good friends but work in the same department. If you happen to be outside when the
mailman comes to your door you might make small talk with him too.
On the other hand, there are certain safe topics that people usually make small talk
about. The weather is probably the number one thing that people who do not know
each other well discuss. Another topic that is generally safe is current events as long
as you are not discussing a controversial issue, such as a recent law. Sport news is a
very common topic, especially if a local team or player is in a tournament or play-off
or doing extremely well or badly. There are also some subjects that are not considered
acceptable when making small talk such a salaries or criticism, or personal issues
mostly because you do not know if you can trust the other person with your secrets or
personal information.
In conclusion, there are many different reasons why people make small talk. The
commonest is to break the ice or just to fill free time, but no matter what your reason
is, small talk helps you improve your conversational skill.
Lets Talk: - Make small talk with the people around you.
Page 173
UNIT SIXTEEN One word is not enough

Jobs and
Occupations
- Accountant
- Actor / actress
- Athlete
- Author
- Baker
- Banker
- Barber
- Beautician
- Broker
- Burglar
- Butcher
- Carpenter
- Chauffeur
- Chef
- Clerk / Janitor
- Coach
- Craftsman
People in
Hospitals
- Anesthesiologist
- Dietician
- Doctor
- Medical technician
- Nurse
- Ophthalmologist
- Patient
Money used
in the US
- 1 cent coin
- Penny
- 5 cents coin
- Nickel
- 10 cent coin
- Dime
- 25 cent coin
- Quarter
- Criminal
- Dentist
- Doctor
- Editor
- Engineer
- Farmer
- Fire Fighter
- Fisherman
- Judge
- Lawyer
- Magician
- Mechanic
- Musician
- Nurse
- Pharmacist
- Pilot
- Poet
- Policeman
- Politician
- Printer
- Professor
- Rabbi
- Priest
- Pastor
- Sailor
- Salesman
- Shoemaker
- Soldier
- Tailor
- Teacher
- Veterinarian
- Waiter
- Waitress
- Watchman
- Pediatrician
- Physician
- Psychiatrist
- Security Guard
- Specialist
- Surgeon
- Visitor
- 50 cent coin
- Half dollar
- 1 dollar bill
- 5 dollar bill
- 10 dollar bill
- 20 dollar bill
- 50 dollar bill
- 100 dollar bill
Page 174
Check Point:
Go through unit nine to unit fifteen, one by one, and talk about the topics of each unit
with your classmates and the teacher. Don't forget to speak your mind and fire away
any kind of question you may have.
Lets Practice
Write your opinion about some issue or problem that youve had recently. Be
prepared to discuss it in class after you finish.
Page 175

- www.youtube.com
Page 176
UNIT SEVENTEEN Hi there

Introducing yourself to a group of

people.
When you introduce yourself, you should:

1. Stand up straight. If you are sitting or doing something else, stop immediately
and greet the person.
2. Look at the other persons face.
3. Offer your hand and shake hands firmly. (Dont wait!)
4. Say your name as you are shaking hands, clearly and loudly enough to be
heard easily. This shows the other person that you are confident.
5. Make a friendly statement. (Say, Nice to meet you.)
A few reasons to use this social skill are because it is important to introduce yourself.
It shows your ability to meet new people confidently. It makes others feel more
comfortable and allows you to make a good first impression. Knowing how to
introduce yourself helps you break the ice when meeting new people.
Likewise, being pleasant is very important when introducing yourself. If you are gruff
or your voice is harsh, you wont leave people with a good impression. So, smile
when giving your name to the other person.
Introductions are the first step in a conversation. If you start out on the right foot, it is
more likely that you will have a pleasant conversation. Making your first impression
a good one is always a plus.
If the other person does not give his or her name, its proper for you to say And your
name is?
Eventually, when you meet a person again, you will have to decide how to reintroduce yourself. If it has been a long time since youve seen the person, or if the
person may have forgotten who you are, then follow the same steps as in the skill. If
the time in between is short, you may choose just to say, Hi, in case you forgot, Im
. This will let the other person remember your name and probably the time you
met without the awkward moment that involves having to ask that again.
For this purpose, try to remember the other persons name. Other people will be
impressed when you take time to remember them.
Lets Talk:
-
Every student will take at least five minutes to introduce themselves properly.
Page 177
UNIT EITHTEEN On a second thought

Disagreeing with others.
When you dont agree with another persons opinion or decision, you should:
1. Remain calm. Getting upset will only make matters worse.
2. Look at the person. This shows that you have confidence.
3. Begin with a positive or neutral statement, such as I know you are trying to
be fair, but . This shows disagreement without rudeness.
4. Explain why you disagree with the opinion or decision. Keep your voice tone
leveled and controlled. Be brief and clear.
5. Listen as the other person explains his or her side of the story.
6. Calmly accept whatever opinion or decision is made.
7. Thank the person for listening, regardless of the outcome.
Some reasons to use this social skill are because it is important to disagree in a calm
manner. It increases the chances that the other person will listen to you.
With this in mind, it may be the only opportunity you have to challenge an opinion or
get a decision changed. You have the right to express your opinions. But you lose that
right if you become upset or aggressive. If the other person feels that you are going to
lose self-control, you stand very little chance of getting your views across.
On the other hand, youre not going to win every time. Some opinions or decisions
will not change. However, learning how to disagree calmly may help vary some of
them. Dont try to modify everything. People will view you as a nuisance.
Therefore, if you are calm and specific when you disagree, people will respect you
for the mature way you handle situations. It pays off in the long run!
Lets Talk: Making a debate.

-
Students have to separate into two different groups. The teacher will throw a
controversial topic to the discussion and will have the students choose one of
two sides, in favor or against. Then, each group will have fifteen minutes to
brain storm and come up with valid strong statements to support their side.
When finished, the teacher will choose who wins based on the statements each
group gave during the debate.
Page 178
UNIT NINETEEN Oh no, you didnt

Accepting Criticisms.
When others tell you how they think you can improve, they give you criticism. To
accept criticism appropriately:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Look at the person. Dont use negative facial expressions.

Stay calm and quiet while the person is talking.
Show you understand. (Say, Okay or I understand.)
Try to correct the problem. If you are asked to do something differently, do it.
If you are asked to stop doing something, stop it. If you cant give a positive
response, at least give one that will not get you into trouble. Its proper to say,
Okay, I understand, or Thanks.
Some reasons to use this social skill are because being able to accept criticism shows
that you can accept responsibility for what you do and accept advice from others. It
also prevents having problems with people in authority. If you can control yourself
and listen to what others have to say about how you can improve, youll have fewer
problems. And, the criticism may really help you!
Above all, it is most important that you stay calm. Take a deep breath, if necessary.
Getting angry or making negative facial expressions will only get you into trouble.
So that, when you respond to the person who is giving you criticism, use as pleasant a
voice tone as possible. You will receive criticism for the rest of your life all people
do. The way you handle it determines how you are treated by others.
Most criticism is designed to help you; however, it is sometimes hard to accept. If
you dont agree with the criticism, ask somebody else who should be a trusted close
person of yours.
In order to keep always improving in a personal level, ask questions if you dont
understand. But dont play games by asking questions when you do understand and
are just being stubborn. Give yourself a chance to progress!
Lets Talk:
-
When have you been criticized? Why was it? How did you take the critics?
What do you usually say when giving critics to someone?
Do you think a critic is always a way to offend somebody?
Page 179
UNIT TWENTY Youre a good person

Getting along with others.
To be successful in dealing with people, you should:

1. Listen to what is being said when another person talks to you.
2. Say something positive if you agree with what the person said. If you dont
agree, say something that wont cause an argument. Use a calm voice tone.
3. Show interest in what the other person has to say. Try to understand his or her
point of view.
Some reasons to use this social skill are because it is important to get along with
others. You will be working and dealing with other people all of your life. If you can
get along with others, you are more likely to be successful in whatever you do.
Getting along shows sensitivity and respect, and makes it more likely that other
people will behave the same way. In other words, treat others the way you want to be
treated!
Sometimes it is not easy to get along with others. If someone does something that you
do not like, or says something negative, you may feel like behaving the same way.
Dont! Stop yourself from saying things that can hurt others feelings. Teasing,
cursing, and insults will only make matters worse. It is better to ignore others
negative behavior than to act like them.
However, getting along with others takes some effort. It is hard to understand why
some people act the way they do. Try to put yourself in their place and maybe it will
be easier to understand.
In short, if you find that you dont like someones behavior, it is better to say nothing
rather than something negative
Lets Talk:
-
Describe to your classmates how you met your closest friend! Did you
immediately get along with that person?
Have you found someone that put you to the end of your rope? What did that
person do that annoyed you?
Is it possible to get along with every person you know? Explain your answer!
If you have a first good impression of someone and you get along, does it
mean that you are right? Could that person become a new best friend?
When is it particularly important to get along with others? Explain why!
Page 180

Parts of a Car
Outside of
a Car
- Accelerator
- Blinker
- Brake
- Bumper
- Clutch
- Dashboard
- Gear
- Windshield
- Headlight
- Horn
- Rearview
- Mirror
- Seat
- Trunk
- Wheel
- Air cleaner
- Door handle
- Exhaust pipe
- Fender
- Front turn signal
- Gas tank cap
- Hood
- Hubcap
- Tire
- License plate
- Radiator grill
- Rear turn signal
- Rear window
- Side mirror
- Side window
- Taillight
Inside of
a car
- Alternator gauge
- Ashtray
- Bucket seat
- Emergency brake
- Emergency flare
- Front seat
- Gasoline level gauge
- Gearshift
Car Verbs
- Accelerate
- Back up
- Change gears
- Crash
- De-accelerate
- Fasten seat-belt
- Fill up with gas
- Idle the engine
- Park
- Battery
- Engine
- Fan belt
- Glove compartment
- Oil gauge
- Rear seat
- Rearview mirror
- Steering wheel
- Sun visor
- Tachometer
- Temperature gauge
- Push the accelerator

- Race
- Run out of gas
- Shift into drive
- Shift into reverse
- Slow down
- Speed up
- Stop
- Pass
Page 181
Lets Talk:
What is your dream car? You have to write an essay presenting and selling what your
dream car would be. After, present it to the class.
Page 182

- www.youtube.com
Page 183
UNIT TWENTY-ONE Could you, please!

Asking for help.
When you need help with something, you should:

1. Decide what the problem is.
2. Ask to speak to the person who is most likely to help you.
3. Look at the person, clearly describe what you need help with, and ask the
person in a pleasant voice tone.
4. Thank the person for helping you.
Some reasons to use this social skill are because it is important to ask others for help.
It is the best way to solve problems you cant figure out. Asking for help in a pleasant
manner makes it more likely that someone will help you.
Although it is nice to figure things out by yourself, sometimes this isnt possible.
Asking someone who has more experience, or has had more success with a similar
problem, is a way to learn how to solve the problem the next time.
Sometimes, people become frustrated, and even get mad, when they cant figure
something out. Learn to ask for help before you get to this point and you will have
more successes than failures.
Always tell the person who is helping you how much you appreciate the help. It
might be nice to offer your help the next time that person needs something.
Lets Talk:
- Describe some situations in which you always have to ask for help.
- Mimic activity. The students have to divide into two groups. Later, a sheet of paper
will be given to each group with different situations that one normally needs to ask
for help. The students have to act every situation until the other group figures it out.
Afterwards, the group that is performing has to give a short presentation about the
situation they acted.
Page 184
UNIT TWENTY-TWO Blah, Blah, Blah

Having a Conversation.
When you are talking with someone, you should:

2. Answer any questions the person asks, and give complete answers. Just saying
Yes or No usually does not give the other person enough information to
keep the conversation going.
3. Avoid negative statements. Talking about past trouble you were in, bragging,
name-calling, or making other negative statements gives a bad impression.
4. Use appropriate grammar. Slang can be used with friends, but dont use it
when
guests
or
people
you
dont
know
very
well are present.
5. Start or add to conversations by asking questions, talking about new or
exciting events, or asking the other person what he or she thinks about
something.
Some reasons to use this social skill are because it is important to have good
conversation skills. You can tell others what you think and get their opinions. Using
this skill well makes new people you meet and guests feel more comfortable. Later in
life, this skill will help you when you apply for and hold a job.
Always include the other persons ideas in the conversation. If you dont, it wont be
a conversation! So that, sharing your opinions and getting the feedback is a great way
to keep a conversation going, but also, be aware of the situation and what you are
talking about. As a result, you will be able to ask question whenever you want.
On the other hand, smile and show interest in what the other person has to say, even if
you dont agree with the person. In any case, when you agree or you don't, paying
attention when someone is talking shows that you are polite and educated.
A great way to begin a conversation is to break the ice with a general topic that
everybody knows about. Therefore, keep up on current events so that you have a wide
range of things to talk about. People who can talk about whats happening and are
good at conversation are usually well-liked and admired by other people. Being
talkative is always a plus when you know how to do it correctly.
Lets Talk:
- Share your opinions about the topic that the teacher will bring to the discussion.
Remember to become a proper talkative person.
Page 185
UNIT TWENTY-THREE Great job!!

Giving and Accepting Compliments.
When you want to say something nice about someone, you should:
2. Give the compliment. Tell him or her exactly what you liked.
3. Make a follow-up statement. If the person says Thanks, say Youre
welcome, in return.
Some reasons to use this social skill are because giving compliments shows that you
notice the accomplishments of others. People like being around someone who is
pleasant, friendly, and says nice things. It also shows that you have confidence in
your ability to talk to others.
Always think of the exact words you want to use before you give the compliment. It
will make you feel more confident and youll be less likely to fumble around for
words.
In order to make a real impression, don't say compliments just to do it, mean what
you say. People can tell the difference between sincerity and phoniness. Dont overdo
it. A couple of sentences will do, for example You did a good job at or You
really did well in .
To finish giving the compliment, you should smile and be enthusiastic. It makes the
other person feel that you really mean it.
Whenever someone says something nice to you, you should:
1. Look at the other person and listen to what he or she is saying. Dont
interrupt.
2. Say Thanks, or something that shows you appreciate what was said.
Some reasons to use this social skill are because being able to accept compliments
shows that you can politely receive another persons positive opinion about
something you have done. It also increases the chances that you will receive future
compliments.
When you receive a compliment, be sure to sincerely thank the person who gave it to
you.. Remember that people give compliments for a variety of reasons. Dont waste a
lot of time wondering why someone gave you a compliment. Just appreciate the fact
that someone took the time to say something nice to you!
Page 186
Lets Talk
Who doesn't like to play? You are going to interact with your classmates playing the
Hangman. Choose at least eight words related to giving or accepting compliments.
Use the blank space below to write and play.
Page 187
UNIT TWENTY-FOUR One word is not enough

Business English
Nouns
- Advantage
- Advertisement
- Advice
- Agenda
- Apology
- Authorization
- Bill
- Brand
- Budget
- Commission
- Comparison
- Competition
- Competitor
- Confirmation
- Costs
- Creditor
- Customer
- Deadline
- Debt
- Debtor
- Decision
- Decrease
- Deficit
- Delivery
- Department
- Description
- Difference
- Disadvantage
- Distribution
- Employee
- Employer
- Enquiry
- Environment
- Equipment
- Estimate
- Experience
- Explanation
- Facilities
- Factory
- Feedback
- Goal
- Goods
- Growth
- Guarantee
- Improvement
- Increase
- Industry
- Instructions
- Interest
- Inventory
- Invoice
- knowledge
- Limit
- Loss
- Margin
- Market
- Message
- Mistake
- Objective
- Offer
- Opinion
- Option
- Order
- Output
- Payment
- Penalty
- Permission
- Possibility
- Product
- Production
- Profit
- Promotion
- Purchase
- Reduction
- Refund
- Reminder
- Repairs
- Report
- Responsibility
- Result
- Retailer
- Rise
- Risk
- Salary
- Sales
- Schedule
- Share
- Signature
- Stock
- Success
- Suggestion
- Supply
- Support
- Target
- Transport
- Turnover
- Wholesaler
Page 188
Check Point:
Go through unit seven to unit fifteen, one by one, and talk about the topics of each
unit with your classmates and the teacher. Don't forget to speak your mind and fire
away any kind of question you may have.
Lets Practice
You have to select a product. It can be anything that has already been created or
something out of your imagination. You are going to become and think like a sponsor
and you have to sell your product to the rest of the class. You have to expose the
qualities of your product, tell to everybody why it is indispensable to them. The
activity will end when everybody has presented their products a winner will be
chosen by majority of votes. Use the blank space bellow to write notes that could help
you during your presentation.
Page 189

- www.youtube.com
Page 190
UNIT TWENTY-FIVE Step by step

Following Instructions.
When you are given an instruction, you should:

1. Look at the person who is talking.
2. Show that you understand. (Say, I understand, Okay, or Ill do it.)
Make sure you wait until the person is done talking before you do what is
asked. It is usually best to answer, but sometimes nodding your head will be
enough to show the person that you understand.
3. Do what is asked in the best way you can.
4. Check back with the person to let him or her know you have finished.
Some reasons to use this social skill are because doing what is asked shows that you
can cooperate and it lets you get back to doing the things you like to do. Following
instructions will help you in school, at home, and with adults and friends.
After you know exactly what has been asked, start the task immediately.
Nevertheless, if you think that doing what somebody asked you results in some type
of negative consequence for you, or you dont understand, asking somebody else who
you trust should be the right option to solve your doubt.
Likewise, do what is asked as pleasantly as possible. It is also important to check
back as soon as you finish. This increases the chances that you will get credit for
doing a job well. It also means that somebody else wont have time to mess it up
before you ensure your work.
Lets Talk
- Select two situations that always cause you trouble, for example, changing a tire.
Write an explanation telling why it is difficult for you to do so. Afterwards, you are
going to come up with instructions to improve the way that it is done. Be careful with
the order and remember to be proper and polite.
Page 191
UNIT TWENTY-SIX May I?

Asking Permission.
When you need to get permission from someone, you should:

2. Be specific when you ask permission. The other person should know exactly
what you are requesting.
3. Be sure to ask rather than demand. May I please ?
4. Give reasons if necessary.
5. Accept the decision.
Some reasons to use this social skill are because asking permission whenever you
want to do something or use something that another person is responsible for. Asking
permission shows your respect for others and increases the chances that your request
will be granted.
For this purpose, it is always wise to ask permission to use something that doesnt
belong to you. It doesnt matter if it is a pencil or someones bike ask permission!
Sometimes, you wont get what you want. But if you have asked permission politely
and correctly, you are more likely to get what you want the next time.
For instance, think about how you would feel if someone used something of yours
without asking first. Besides feeling that the person was not polite and did not respect
your property, you would be worried that the item might get broken or lost.
Lets Talk
- What occasions do you usually have to ask permission?
-Are you demanding or easy going? Why?
- Who do you have to ask permission to? Why? Does it upset you?
- What do you do if you get a no for an answer? Do you accept it or reject it?
- Do you have someone to ask permission to you? Who is that person? What grounds
do you take to give or deny permission?
Page 192
UNIT TWENTY-SEVEN Im so sorry!

Apologizing.
When you have done something that hurts another persons feelings or results in
negative consequences for another person, and you need to apologize, you should:
1. Look at the person. It shows confidence.
2. Say what you are sorry about. (Say, Im sorry I said that or Im sorry, I
didnt listen to what you said.)
3. Make a follow-up statement if the person says something to you. (Say, Is
there any way I can make it up to you? or It wont happen again.)
4. Thank the person for listening (even if the person did not accept your
apology).
Some reasons to use this social skill are because apologizing shows that you are
sensitive to others feelings. It increases the chances that other people will be careful
of your feelings in return. Apologizing also shows that you are responsible enough to
admit your mistakes.
On the other hand, it is easy to avoid making apologies; it takes guts to be mature
enough to do it. Convince yourself that making an apology is the best thing to do and
then do it!
Nevertheless, if the other person is upset with you, the response you receive may not
be very nice at that time. Be prepared to take whatever the other person says. Be
confident that you are doing the right thing.
When people look back on your apology, they will see that you were able to realize
what you did wrong. They will think more positively of you in the future.
In conclusion, an apology wont erase what you did wrong. But, it may help change a
persons opinion of you in the long run
Lets Talk
- When have you had to apologize? What did you do wrong? Did the person accept
it?
- What do you usually say when making an apology?
- Have you had people apologizing to you? What did they do that upset you?
- Have you lost friends or family because the denial of an apology?
Page 193
UNIT TWENTY-EIGHT You can say that again!
Listening to others.
When someone is speaking, you should:

1. Look at the person who is talking.
2. Sit or stand quietly.
3. Wait until the person is through talking. Dont interrupt; it will seem like
youre being rude or arent interested in what is being said.
4. Show that you understand. Say, Okay, Thanks, I see, etc., or ask the
person to explain if you dont understand.
Some reasons to use this social skill are because listening to others shows you are
polite, pleasant, and cooperative. It increases the chances that people will listen to
you. Likewise, listening well helps you do the correct thing since you are more likely
to understand what the other person has said.
On the contrary, if you are having trouble listening, think of how you would feel if
other people didnt listen to you. Try to remember everything the person said. If you
are going to need the information later, write it down. People who learn to listen well
do better on jobs and in school.
With this in mind, dont use any negative facial expressions. Continue looking at the
other person, and nod your head or occasionally say something to let the other person
know you are still listening.
Lets Talk
- Every student is going to get five minutes of continued speaking time. They will
turn cards that the teacher will take to class which will have a topic that the student
must talk about. Each student can get two cards randomly. The rest of the class must
pay attention because you will have to ask questions to the speaker at the end.
Page 194

Fruits
- Apple
- Apricot
- Banana
- Blackberry
- Blueberry
- Cherry
- Cranberry
- Currant
- Fig
Vegetables
Crimes
- Grape
- Kiwi
- Kumquat
- Lemon
- Lime
- Melon
- Nectarine
- Orange
- Peach
- Asparagus
- Beans
- Beet
- Broccoli
- Brussels sprouts
- Cabbage
- Carrot
- Cauliflower
- Celery
- Corn
- Arson
- Assault
- Bigamy
- Blackmail
- Bribery
- Burglary
- Child abuse
- Conspiracy
- Espionage
- Forgery
- Pear
- Persimmon
- Plum
- Pomegranate
- Prune
- Raspberry
- Strawberry
- Tangerine
- Watermelon
- Cucumber
- Eggplant
- Green pepper
- Kale
- Lettuce
- Okra
- Onion
- Peas
- Potato
- Pumpkins
- fraud
- genocide
- hijacking
- homicide
- kidnapping
- manslaughter
- mugging
- murder
- perjury
- rape
- Radish
- Spinach
- Tomatoes
- Turnips
- Riot
- Robbery
- Shoplifting
- Slander
- Smuggling
- Treason
- Trespassing
Page 195
Lets Talk:
Write an essay about the importance of a well and balanced nutrition and another one
about the insecurity in a given place you chose. Be prepared to present it to the class
and discuss about it.
Page 196

- www.youtube.com
Page 197
LISTA DE VERBOS IRREGULARES

BASE
FORM
Arise
Awake
Be
Bear
Beat
Become
Begin
Bend
Bet
Bid
Bind
Bite
Bleed
Blow
Break
Breed
Bring
Broadcast
Build
Burn
Burst
Buy
Cast
Catch
Choose
Cling
Come
Cost
Creep
Cut
Deal
Dig
Dive
Do
Draw
Dream
Drive
Drink
Eat
Fall
SIMPLE
PAST
arose
awoke
was, were
bore
beat
became
began
bent
bet
bid
bound
bit
bled
blew
broke
bred
brought
broadcast
built
burnt
burst
bought
cast
caught
chose
clung
came
cost
crept
cut
dealt
dug
dove
did
drew
dreamt
drove
drank
ate
fell
PAST
PARTICIPLE
arisen
awoken
been
born
beat
become
begun
bent
bet
bid
bound
bitten
bled
blow
broken
bred
brought
broadcast
built
burnt
burst
bought
cast
caught
chosen
clung
come
cost
crept
cut
dealt
dug
dived
done
drawn
dreamt
driven
drunk
eaten
fallen
BASE
FORM
Feed
Feel
Fight
Find
Fit
Flee
Fly
Forbid
Forget
Forego
Forgive
Forsake
Freeze
Get
Give
Go
Grind
Grow
Hang
Hear
Hide
Hit
Hold
Hurt
Keep
Kneel
Knit
Know
Lay
Lead
Leap
Learn
Leave
Lend
Let
Lie
Light
Lose
Make
Mean
SIMPLE
PAST
fed
felt
fought
found
fit
fled
flew
forbade
forgot
forwent
forgave
forsook
froze
got
gave
went
ground
grew
hung
heard
hid
hit
held
hurt
kept
knelt
knit
knew
laid
led
leapt
learnt
left
lent
let
lay
lit
lost
made
meant
PAST
PARTICIPLE
fed
felt
fought
found
fit
fled
flown
forbidden
forgotten
forgone
forgiven
forsaken
frozen
got
given
gone
ground
grown
hung
heard
hidden
hit
held
hurt
kept
knelt
knit
known
laid
led
leapt
learnt
left
lent
let
lain
lighted
lost
made
meant
Page 198
BASE
FORM
Meet
Mislay
Mistake
Mow
Overcome
Overdo
SIMPLE
PAST
met
mislaid
mistook
mowed
overcame
overdid
PAST
PARTICIPLE
met
mislaid
mistaken
mown
overcome
overdone
Overthrow
overthrew
overthrown
Pay
Plead
Prove
Put
Quit
Read
Rid
Ride
Ring
Rise
Run
Saw
Say
See
Seek
Sell
Send
Set
Sew
Shake
Shave
Shear
Shed
Shine
Shoot
Show
Shrink
Shut
Sing
Sink
Sit
Sleep
Slay
Slide
Slit
Smell
paid
pled
proved
put
quit
read
rid
rode
rang
rose
ran
sawed
said
saw
sought
sold
sent
set
sewed
shook
shaved
shore
shed
shone
shot
showed
shrank
shut
sang
sank
sit
slept
slew
slid
slit
smelt
paid
pled
proven
put
quit
read
rid
ridden
rung
rise
run
sawn
said
seen
sought
sold
sent
set
sewn
shaken
shaven
shorn
shed
shone
shot
shown
shrunk
shut
sung
sunk
sit
slept
slain
slid
slit
smelt
BASE
FORM
SIMPLE
PAST
PAST
PARTICIPLE
Sow
Speak
Speed
Spend
Spill
Spin
Spit
Split
Spread
Stand
Steal
Stick
Sting
Stink
Strike
Strive
Swear
Sweep
Swim
Swing
Take
Teach
Tear
Tell
Think
Thrive
Throw
Thrust
sowed
spoke
sped
spent
spilt
spun
spat
split
spread
stood
stole
stuck
stung
stank
struck
strove
swore
swept
swam
swung
took
taught
tore
told
thought
throve
threw
thrust
sown
spoken
sped
spent
spilt
spun
spit
split
spread
stood
stolen
stuck
stung
stunk
struck
striven
sworn
swept
swum
swung
taken
taught
torn
told
though
thrived
thrown
thrust
Understand
understood
understood
Uphold
Upset
Wake
Wear
Weave
Wed
Weep
Wind
Win
Withhold
upheld
upset
woke
wore
wove
wed
wept
wound
won
withheld
upheld
upset
woken
worn
woven
wed
wept
wound
won
withheld
Withstand
withstood
withstood
Wring
Write
wrung
wrote
wrung
written
Page 199
LISTA DE VERBOS REGULARES

Accept
Add
Admire
Admit
Advice
Afford
Agree
Alert
Allow
Amuse
Analyze
Announce
Annoy
Answer
Apologize
Appear
Applaud
Appreciate
Approve
Argue
Arrange
Arrest
Arrive
Ask
Attach
Attack
Attempt
Attend
Attract
Avoid
Back
Bake
Balance
Ban
Bang
Bathe
Battle
Beam
Beg
Behave
Belong
Bless
Blind
Blink
Blot
Blush
Boil
Bolt
Book
Bore
Borrow
Bounce
Bow
Box
Brake
Breathe
Bruise
Brush
Bubble
Burn
Bury
Buzz
Calculate
Call
Camp
Care
Carry
Carve
Cause
Challenge
Change
Charge
Chase
Cheat
Check
Cheer
Chew
Chop
Claim
Clap
Clean
Clear
Clip
Close
Coach
Coil
Collect
Color
Comb
Command
Communicate
Compare
Compete
Complain
Complete
Concentrate
Concern
Confess
Confuse
Connect
Consider
Consist
Contain
Continue
Copy
Correct
Cough
Count
Cover
Crack
Crash
Cross
Crush
Cry
Cure
Curve
Damage
Dance
Dare
Decay
Deceive
Decide
Decorate
Delay
Delight
Deliver
Depend
Describe
Desert
Deserve
Destroy
Detect
Develop
Disagree
Disappear
Disapprove
Discover
Dislike
Divide
Doubt
Drag
Drain
Dream
Dress
Drop
Drum
Dry
Dust
Earn
Educate
Embarrass
Employ
Empty
Encourage
End
Enjoy
Enter
Entertain
Escape
Examine
Excite
Excuse
Exercise
Exist
Expand
Expect
Explain
Explode
Extend
Face
Fail
Fear
File
Fill
Film
Fire
Fit
Fix
Float
Flow
Fold
Follow
Fool
Force
Form
Found
Frighten
Fry
Gather
Gaze
Glue
Grab
Greet
Grip
Groan
Guarantee
Guard
Guess
Guide
Handle
Hang
Happen
Harass
Harm
Hate
Heal
Heat
Help
Hook
Hug
Hunt
Hurry
Identify
Ignore
Imagine
Page 200
Impress
Improve
Include
Increase
Influence
Inform
Inject
Injure
Instruct
Intend
Interest
Interfere
Interrupt
Introduce
Invent
invite
Irritate
Itch
Jog
Join
Joke
Judge
Jump
Kick
Kill
Kiss
Knock
Label
Land
Last
Laugh
Launch
Learn
Level
License
Lick
Lie
Learn
Like
List
Listen
Live
Load
Lock
Long
Look
Love
Manage
March
Mark
Marry
Match
Matter
Measure
Melt
Memorize
Mend
Mess up
Milk
Miss
Mix
Moan
Move
Mug
Multiply
Murder
Nail
Name
Need
Nest
Nod
Note
Notice
Number
Obey
Obtain
Occur
Offend
Offer
Open
Order
Owe
Own
Paint
Park
Pass
Pause
Peel
Perform
Permit
Plan
Poke
Polish
Possess
Post
Pour
Practice
Pray
Prefer
Prepare
Present
Preserve
Press
Pretend
Prevent
Print
Produce
Promise
Protect
Provide
Pull
Punish
Push
Race
Rain
Raise
Reach
Realize
Recognize
Reduce
Reflect
Release
Remember
Remind
Remove
Repair
Reply
Report
Return
Save
Scare
Scream
Search
Share
Sign
Skip
Smile
Smoke
Snow
Soak
Sound
Stamp
Stare
Start
Stay
Step
Stir
Stop
Stretch
Succeed
Suggest
Support
Suppose
Surprise
Surround
Suspect
Talk
Taste
Tease
Terrify
Test
Thank
Tie
Tire
Touch
Trace
Trade
Travel
Try
Turn
Type
Undress
Unfasten
Unlock
Use
Visit
Wail
Wait
Walk
Wander
Want
Warm
Warn
Wash
Waste
Watch
Water
Wave
Weigh
Welcome
Whine
Whip
Whirl
Whisper
Whistle
Wink
Wipe
Wish
Wobble
Wonder
Work
Worry
Wrap
Wreck
Wrestle
Wriggle
Yawn
Yell
Zip
Zoom
Page 201
VERBOS PREPOSICIONALES
Add up: totalizar
Add up to: alcanzar un total
Answer back: contestar de mal modo
Answer for: responder por
Ask about: preguntar por (un asunto)
Ask after: preguntar por la salud
Ask for: pedir, preguntar por
Ask up to: pedir hasta (un precio)
Ask back: invitar a volver
Ask down: invitar a bajar
Ask in: invitar a entrar
Ask out: invitar a salir
Ask up: invitar a subir.
Back away: retroceder
Back up: reforzar
Be for: estar a favor de
Be in: estar en casa
Be off: irse, estar apagado
Be on: estar encendido
Be out: estar fuera
Be over: estar acabado
Be up: estar levantado
Bend down: agacharse
Bend over: inclinarse
Blow away: llevarse (el viento)
Blow down: derrumbarse por viento
Blow out: apagar(se) una llama
Blow up: volar (con explosivos)
Break away: soltarse
Break down: derruir, averiarse
Break in: irrumpir, interrumpir
Break off: estallar (una guerra)
Bring back: devolver
Bring about: acarrear
Bring along: traer (consigo)
Bring down: derribar, rebajar
Bring in: hacer entrar
Bring out: hacer salir, publicar
Bring up: criar, educar
Brush off: quitar el polvo
Burn away: consumirse (el fuego)
Burn down: derrumarse por el fuego
Burn out: consumirse por el fuego
Burn up: consumirse (por el fuego)

Buy for: comprar por o para
Buy over: sobornar
Buy up: acaparar
Call at: hacer una visita, hacer escala
Call away: seguir llamando
Call back: llamar a alguien de regreso
Call for: pedir a voces, exigir
Call in: llamar a alguien para que entre
Call on: ir a ver a alguien.
Call out: gritar
Call over: pasar lista, enumerar
Call up: telefonear
Call down: llamar para que baje
Carry along: persuadir
Carry off: llevarse a la fuerza
Carry on: continuar
Carry out: llevar a cabo
Clear away: dispersar
Clear off: marcharse
Clear out: marcharse
Clear up: aclarar tiempo o misterio
Close down: cerrar
Close up: acercarse
Come about: suceder
Come across: encontrarse con
Come along: acompaar a venir
Come at: embestir
Come away: desprenderse
Come down: bajar
Come for: venir por (en busca de)
Come from: venir de
Come in: entrar
Come off: desprenderse
Come on: vamos (en imperativo)
Come out: salir
Come to: ascender (una suma)
Come up: subir
Come up to: acercarse a
Count in: incluir
Count on: contar con
Count up: calcular
Count up to: contar hasta
Page 202
Cry for: pedir llorando

Cry out: llamar a gritos
Cry over: lamentarse
Cry to: llamar a gritos
Cut down: reducir gastos, talar
Cut in: interrumpir
Cut off: separar de un tajo
Cut out: recortar , omitir
Cut through: acortar por un atajo
Cut up: trinchar, triturar
Die away: cesar poco a poco
Die out: extinguirse
Do without: pasarse sin (carecer de )
Draw away: alejarse
Draw back: retroceder
Draw down: bajar
Draw on: aproximarse, retirar fondos
Draw out: sacar, redactar, alargarse
Drive back: rechazar
Drive by: pasar en coche
Drive in: entrar en coche, introducir
Drive out: salir en coche, expulsar
Drive off: alejarse en coche
Eat away: roer, carcomer, desgastar
Eat into: corroer, comerse
Eat out: comer fuera, cenar fuera
Eat up: comerse, consumir, devorar
Egg on: animar, incitar
End in: acabar en, terminar con
End off: acabar, terminar, ir a parar
Face up to: afrontar, enfrentarse a
Fall apart: romperse, deshacerse,
caerse a pedazos
Fall away: disminuir,desprenderse
Fall back: retroceder, retirarse
Fall back on to: recurrir a, echar
mano de, apoyarse en.
Fall behind: retrasarse, quedarse atrs
Fall behind with: retrasarse
Fall down: caer, caerse, hundirse,
derrumbarse, fallar
Fall in love: enamorarse de.
Fall in: desplomarse, venirse abajo,
ponerse en filas
Fall into: dividirse en, clasificarse en,
adquirir
Fall off: desprenderse, caerse

Fall on: incidir en, caer sobre
Fall out: pelearse, romper filas, caerse
Fall over: caer, tropezar con, caerse
Fall through: fracasar, quedar en nada
Fall to: empezar a, ponerse
Fall under: clasificarse en
Feel for: compadecer a, compadecerse
Feel up to: sentirse con nimos para,
sentirse con fuerzas para
Figure on: contar con, esperar
Figure out: comprender, explicarse,
resolver, calcular
Fill in: rellenar
Fill in for: sustituir a
Fill out: engordar, rellenar
Fill up: llenar, llenarse
Find out: preguntar, averiguar, enterarse
de, informarse, enterarse
Get across: cruzar, atravesar, hacer
comprender, hacerse entender
Get ahead: adelantar, progresar
Get along: arreglrselas
Get along with: llevarse bien con
Get around: moverse, desplazarse
Get around to: encontrar tiempo para
Get at: alcanzar, llegar a
Get away: escaparse, irse, alejar, quitar,
sacar
Get away with: salir impune de
Get back: volver, regresar, moverse
hacia atrs, retroceder, recuperar
Get behind: atrasarse
Get by: arreglrselas
Get down: deprimir, desanimar
Get down to: ponerse a
Get in: entrar, meter
Get into: llegar a, entrar en, subir
Get off: quitarse, bajarse de, salir
Get on: subirse a, montar a, progresar,
avanzar
Get on to: ponerse en contacto con,
empezar a hablar de, pasar a
Get out: sacar, quitar, salir, bajar de,
bajarse de, escaparse, llegar a saberse,
hacerse pblico
Page 203
Get out of: librarse de

Get over: sobreponerse a, superar
Get over with: acabar con
Get round to: encontrar tiempo para
Get through: acabar, terminar
Get together: reunirse, juntarse,
recoger, reunir
Get up: levantarse, subir
Get up to: hacer, llegar a
Give away: distribuir, repartir,
entregar, delatar, traicionar, revelar
Give back: devolver
Give in: darse por vencido, rendirse
Give in to: ceder ante
Give off: despedir, desprender, emitir
Give onto: dar a
Give out: repartir, sufrir una avera
Give over: entregar, dedicar, asignar,
dejar de
Give up: abandonar, renunciar a,
darse por vencido, rendirse
Give up on: abandonar, desistir
Go about: emprender
Go after: perseguir, andar tras
Go against: ir en contra de
Go ahead: proceder
Go along: pasar por, progresar
Go along with: estar de acuerdo con
Go away: marcharse
Go back: volver, regresar, remontarse
Go by: pasar por un sitio
Go down: bajar, hundirse
Go for: ir a buscar, valer para
Go in: entrar
Go in for: participar en, tomar parte
Go into: entrar en, investigar
Go off: marcharse, estallar, sonar
(alarma), apagarse
Go off with: escaparse con
Go on: seguir, hablar sin parar
Go out: salir, apagarse
Go over: revisar, repasar
Go over to: cambiar a, pasar a.
Go round: dar vueltas, pasar por casa
de, visitar
Go through: pasar por (situacin)
Go through with: llevar a cabo

Go towards: destinar a, reservar para
Go under: hundirse, fracasar
Go up: subir, acercarse, levantarse
Go with: acompaar, ir con, estar
incluido, hacer juego con
Go without: pasar sin, prescindir de
Grow apart: distanciarse
Grow away from: distanciarse de
Grow into: convertirse en, hacerse
Grow on: llegar a gustar
Grow out of: perder, quitarse
Grow up: madurar, desarrollarse
Hand around: repartir, ofrecer, pasar
Hand back: devolver
Hand down: dejar en herencia
Hand in: entregar, presentar, notificar
Hand on: transmitir, heredar
Hand out: repartir, distribuir
Hand over: entregar
Hang about: esperar, frecuentar
Hang back: quedarse atrs, vacilar
Hang down: colgar, caer
Hang on: agarrarse, esperar
Hang out: pasar el rato
Hang up: colgar
Hold back: retener, contener, reprimir,
no atreverse, abstenerse
Hold off: mantener alejado
Hold on: agarrarse fuerte, no colgar
Hold on to: agarrarse a
Hold over: aplazar
Hold with: estar de acuerdo con
Iron out: planchar, resolver, solucionar
Jack up: levantar con gato, subir
Jump at: aceptar sin pensarlo
keep at: perseverar en algo
keep away: mantener a distancia
keep back: retener, guardar, ocultar
keep down: oprimir, sujetar
keep from: abstenerse de, guardarse de
keep in: no dejar salir
keep in with: mantener buenas
relaciones con
keep on: seguir, continuar/ no quitarse.
keep out: no dejar entrar, no dejar pasar
Page 204
Keep out of: no entrar, no meterse en

Keep to: atenerse a
Keep together: mantenerse juntos
Keep under: tener subyugado
Keep up with: mantener, seguir,
aguantar el ritmo, mantenerse al da
Kick against something: protestar
contra, reaccionar contra
Kick around: andar por ah
Kick in: romper a patadas
Kick off: hacer el saque inicial
Kick out: echar a alguien
Knock down: derribar, atropellar
Knock off: tirar, hacer caer
Knock out: dejar sin conocimiento,
dejar dormido, poner fuera de
combate, volcar
Knock together: hacer de prisa, hacer
rpidamente/ entrechocarse.
Knock up: dejar embarazada
Lay about: agredir
Lay aside: dejar a un lado
Lay before: presentar
Lay by: guarder/ ahorrar.
Lay down: dejar, soltar, imponer
Lay in: proveerse de
Lay into: atacar
Lay off: despedir, dejar en paz, dejar
de molestar, parar
Lay on: facilitar, suministrar, cargar
Lay out: extender, colocar, presentar
Lay up: almacenar
Leave off: dejar de, acabar, terminar
Leave out: omitir, excluir, excluir
Let down: fallar, defraudar
Let in: dejar entrar
Let off: dejar, hacer explotar, dejar
marcharse, dejar en libertad
Let on: decir, descubrir, hacer ver
Let out: dejar salir, soltar
Let through: dejar pasar
Let up: parar
Let up on: dejar en paz
Look after: ocuparse de, atender a,
cuidar de
Look ahead: mirar hacia adelante
Look at: mirar, considerar

Look back: mirar atrs
Look down on: despreciar
Look for: buscar
Look forward to: esperar con ansias
Look into: investigar
Look on: considerer, observar
Look like: parecerse a
Look onto: dar a
Look out: ir con cuidado, buscarse
Look out for: esperar, estar al tanto
Look over: mirar por encima
Look round: volver la cabeza, mirar
Look through: revisar, ojear
Look to: centrarse en
Look up: mejorar, consultar, buscar
Look up to: respetar
Make after: seguir a, perseguir a
Make for: dirigirse hacia, abalanzarse
sobre, contribuir a, crear, conducir a
Make into: convertir en, transformar en
Make off: escaparse, largarse, huir
Make away with: escaparse con
Make out: extender, divisar, besarse,
comprender, arreglrselas
Make over: ceder, transferir
Make up: inventar, componer,
confeccionar, maquillar, compensar,
hacer las paces, reconciliarse
Make up for: compensar
Make up to: halagar a, recompensar
Make with: dar, traer
Mark down: rebajar el precio de, bajar
la nota de
Mark off: distinguir, delimitar, tachar
Mark out: marcar, trazar, seleccionar
Mark up: subir el precio de
Mix up: mezclar bien, confundir,
desordenar, revolver, mezclar
Nod off: dormirse, dar cabezadas.
Pass away: pasar a mejor vida
Pass by: pasar, pasar de largo
Pass down: pasar, transmitir
Pass for: pasar por
Pass on: pasar, dar, pasar a mejor vida.
Pass out: perder el conocimiento
Page 205
Pass over: pasar por alto

Pass through: estar de paso, atravesar
Pass up: dejar pasar, dejar escapar
Pick on: meterse con, escoger
Pick out: elegir, escoger, reconocer
Pick up: levantar, recoger, adquirir,
seguir, continuar
Pick up on: hacer resea de
Pitch forward: caer de cabeza
Pitch in: empezar, contribuir
Pitch into: emprender enrgicamente
Pitch off: quitar de encima, sacudir
Pitch over: tirar, volcarse
Pull about: manosear, estropear
Pull along: arrastrarse, arrastrar
Pull apart: romper, partir en dos
Pull away: arrancar, quitar
Pull back: retirar, retener, contenerse
Pull down: hacer caer, tumbar
Pull in: recoger, apretarse el cinturn.
Pull off: arrancar, separar, concluir
con xito algo, lograrlo, vencer
Pull over: volcar, hacerse a un lado,
desviarse hacia un lado
Pull through: sacar a uno de un apuro
o de una enfermedad
Pull together: trabajar con un espritu
de equipo, serenarse, animarse
Pull up: alzar, levantar, detenerse,
contenerse, mejorar su posicin
Put across: comunicar, hacer
entender, comunicar eficazmente lo
que uno quiere decir
Put apart: separar a alguien de otras
personas
Put aside: rechazar, desechar, dejar,
poner a un lado, guardar
Put forth: alargar, tender, extender
Put forward: nombrar, presentar,
proponer
Put in: meter, introducir, insertar,
conectar, sembrar
Put off: aplazar, posponer, dejar para
despus, disuadir, desconcertar,
desanimar, dejar, quitarse, apagar,
hacerse a la mar, salir
Put on: ponerse, aplicar, acelerar

Put out: sacar, poner fuera, poner la
ropa a secar, dislocarse
Put through: cerrar, someter a uno a
una prueba
Put together: juntar, reunir
Put up: alzar, levantar, poner en alto,
oponer
Put up with: aguantar, resignarse a,
conformarse con
Ride about: pasearse a caballo, en
coche, en bicicleta
Ride away: alejarse, irse, partir
Ride back: volver a caballo, en
bicicleta, etc
Ride on: depender de
Ride out: aguantar hasta el final de
Rip off: arrancar
Rip up: romper, hacer pedazos
Round down: redondear a la baja
Round off: completar, acabar
Round on: volverse contra
Round up: redondear al alza
Run across: cruzar, tropezar con
Run after: perseguir
Run along: irse
Run away: irse corriendo, escaparse
Run away with: escaparse con, dejarse
llevar por
Run down: atropellar, criticar, agotar,
bajar corriendo
Run in: rodar, detener, entrar corriendo
Run into: chocar con, tropezar con
Run off: imprimir, irse corriendo
Run off with: escaparse con, llevarse
Run out: acabarse ,salir corriendo
Run over: atropellar, rebosar, derramar
Run through: ensayar, repasar, echar
un vistazo a
Run up: subir corriendo, acumular
Set about: empezar a, ponerse a, atacar
Set against: enemistar con, poner en
contra de
Set apart: distinguir, hacer diferente
Set aside: guardar, ahorrar, dejar
reservar, dejar de lado, anular
Page 206
Set back: apartar, retirar, retrasar

Set down: poner por escrito
Set forth: emprender marcha, partir
Set in: empezar, comenzar, declararse
Set off: salir, ponerse en camino,
hacer estallar, hacer explotar, resaltar
Set on: echar, atacar, agredir
Set out: partir, salir, proponerse
Set to: ponerse a, empezar a
Set up: levantar, colocar, armar,
tender una trampa a, establecerse
Slip away: pasar, irse
Slip by: pasar, transcurrir
Slip into: ponerse
Slip off: quitarse
Slip on: ponerse
Slip out: escaparse
Slip out of: quitarse
Slip up: equivocarse
Stand aside: apartarse, quitarse de en
medio, no tomar parte
Stand back: apartarse, echarse hacia
atrs, alejarse
Stand by: cruzarse de brazos,
quedarse sin hacer nada, respaldar
Stand down: retirarse
Stand for: representar, defender,
apoyar, tolerar, permitir, consentir
Stand in for: sustituir, suplir
Stand out: destacar, sobresalir
Stand over: vigilar a, velar a
Stand to: estar en estado de alerta
Stand up: ponerse de pie, levantarse
Stand up for: defender, apoyar
Stand up to: hacer frente a, resistir a
Show off: fanfarronear, presumir
Show up: hacer resaltar, hacer
destacar, presentarse, aparecer
Take after: parecerse a
Take apart: desarmar
Take aside: llevar a un lado
Take away: llevarse, quitar
Take back: aceptar algo devuelto,
retirar, retractar, hacer recordar
Take down: quitar, bajar, desmontar,
apuntar, humillar
Take for: tomar por

Take in: alojar, incluir, abarcar
Take off: quitarse, despegar/ irse
Take on: encargarse de, asumir
Take out: sacar, invitar a salir, llevar
comida a casa, eliminar
Take over: tomar posesin de, adquirir
Take over from: relevar, sustituir
Take up: ocupar, subir, levantar, ocupar
Take upon: encargarse de
Take up with: entrar en relaciones con
Tell against: obrar en contra de
Tell apart: distinguir
Tell off: regaar, reir, destacar
Throw away: tirar, desaprovechar
Throw back: devolver, echar atrs
Throw back on: obligar a recurrir a
Throw in: incluir gratis
Throw off: deshacerse de, librarse de
Throw on: ponerse
Throw out: echar, expulsar, rechazar
Throw up: vomitar, abandonar
Try on: probarse
Try out: probar, ensayar
Turn against: ponerse en contra
Turn around: volverse, darse la vuelta
Turn down: rechazar, no aceptar
Turn off: desconectar, apagar, cerrar
Turn on: conectar, encender, abrir,
dirigir, excitar, entusiasmar, depender de
Turn over: dar la vuelta a, volver, poner
al revs, entregar
Turn to: acudir a, recorrer a, buscar,
pasar a, dedicarse a, darse a, empezar.
Wait behind: quedarse, quedarse para
esperar a uno
Wait in: estar en casa esperando a uno
Wait up: velar, seguir sin acostarse.
Wake up: dejar de dormir
Walk away: irse, alejarse, evadirse de
Walk back: volver a pie, regresar
andando
Walk out: salir, retirarse, declararse en
huelga, abandonar a uno, dejar plantado
Walk over: atropellar a uno, tratar mal,
dar una paliza a alguien en algn deporte
Page 207
LISTA DE ADJETIVOS
APARIENCIA
Adorable
Adventurous
Aggressive
Alert
Attractive
Average
Beautiful
Blue-eyed
Bloody
Blushing
Bright
Clean
Clear
Cloudy
Colorful
Crowded
Cute
Dark
Drab
Distinct
Dull
Elegant
Excited
Fancy
Filthy
Glamorous
Gleaming
Gorgeous
Graceful
Grotesque
Handsome
Homely
Light
Long
Magnificent
Misty
Motionless
Muddy
Old-fashioned
Plain
Poised
Precious
Quaint
Shiny
Smoggy
Sparkling
Spotless
Stormy
Strange
Ugly
Ugliest
Unsightly
Unusual
CONDICION
Alive
Annoying
Bad
Better
Beautiful
Brainy
Breakable
Busy
Careful
Cautious
Clever
Clumsy
Concerned
Crazy
Curious
Dead
Different
Difficult
Doubtful
Easy
Expensive
Famous
Fragile
Frail
Gifted
Helpful
Helpless
Horrible
Important
Impossible
Inexpensive
Innocent
Inquisitive
Modern
Mushy
Odd
Open
Outstanding
Poor
Powerful
Prickly
Puzzled
Real
Rich
Shy
Sleepy
Stupid
Super
Talented
Tame
Tender
Tough
Uninterested
Vast
Wandering
Wild
Wrong
EMOCIONES
Angry
Annoyed
Anxious
Arrogant
Ashamed
Awful
Bad
Bewildered
black
Blue
Bored
Clumsy
Combative
Condemned
Confused
Crazy
Flipped-out
Creepy
Cruel
Dangerous
Defeated
Defiant
Depressed
Disgusted
Disturbed
Dizzy
Dull
Embarrassed
Envious
Evil
Fierce
Foolish
Frantic
Frightened
Grieving
Grumpy
Helpless
Homeless
Hungry
Hurt
Ill
Itchy
Jealous
Jittery
Lazy
Lonely
Mysterious
Nasty
Naughty
Nervous
Obnoxious
Outrageous
Repulsive
Scary
Selfish
Sore
Tense
Terrible
Testy
Thoughtless
Tired
Troubled
Upset
Uptight
Weary
Worried
Agreeable
Amused
Brave
Calm
Charming
Cheerful
Comfortable
Cooperative
Courageous
Delightful
Determined
Eager
Elated
Enchanting
Encouraging
Energetic
Enthusiastic
Excited
Exuberant
Fair
Faithful
Fantastic
Fine
Friendly
Funny
Gentle
Glorious
Good
Page 208
Happy
Healthy
Helpful
Hilarious
Jolly
Joyous
Kind
Lively
Lovely
Lucky
Nice
Obedient
Perfect
Pleasant
Proud
Relieved
Silly
Smiling
Splendid
Successful
Thankful
Thoughtful
Victorious
Vivacious
Witty
Wonderful
Zealous
Zany
FORMAS
Broad
Chubby
Curved
Deep
Flat
High
Hollow
Low
Narrow
Round
Shallow
Skinny
Square
Straight
Wide
TAMAO
Big
Colossal
Fat
Gigantic
Great
Huge
Immense
Large
Little
Mammoth
Massive
Miniature
Petite
Puny
Scrawny
Short
Small
Tall
Teeny
Teeny-tiny
Tiny
SONIDO
Deafening
Faint
Harsh
High-pitched
Hissing
Hushed
Loud
Melodic
Moaning
Mute
Noisy
Purring
Quiet
Raspy
Resonant
Screeching
Shrill
Silent
Voiceless
Whispering
TIEMPO
Ancient
Brief
Early
Fast
Late
Long
Modern
Old
Old-fashioned
Quick
Rapid
Short
Slow
Swift
Young
GUSTO
TACTO
Bitter
Delicious
Fresh
Juicy
Ripe
Rotten
Salty
Sour
Spicy
Stale
Sticky
Strong
Sweet
Tasteless
Tasty
Thirsty
Fluttering
Fuzzy
Greasy
Grubby
Hard
Hot
Icy
Loose
Melted
Nutritious
Plastic
Prickly
Rainy
Rough
Scattered
Shaggy
Shaky
Sharp
Shivering
Silky
Slimy
Slippery
Smooth
Soft
Solid
Steady
Sticky
Tender
Tight
Uneven
Weak
Wet
Wooden
Yummy
Flaky
Fluffy
Freezing
Hot
Warm
Wet
CANTIDAD
Abundant
Empty
Few
Heavy
Light
Many
Numerous
Substantial
TACTO
Boiling
Breezy
Broken
Bumpy
Chilly
Cold
Cool
Creepy
Crooked
Cuddly
Curly
Damaged
Damp
Dirty
Dry
Dusty
Filthy
Page 209

Carrera's Language Learning. English Book For Spanish Speakers (Full Version)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Carrera's Language Learning. English Book For Spanish Speakers (Full Version)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ENGLISH BOOK FOR

LA IMPORTANCIA DEL IDIOMA INGLS

Hoy en da, cualquier investigador o profesional que quiera estar al da o

CLAVES PARA DOMINAR EL IDIOMA

Personalmente, pienso que el ingls se aprende paulatinamente durante los

Un retraso significante que usualmente ocurre es que algunos estudiantes

La Importancia del Idioma Ingls

Pronombres Personales, verbo To Be,

These / Those. Plural -S

Verbos en 1ra, 2da y 3ra persona.

Wh- questions con verbo to be

Formacin de Plurales. These / Those

There is / There are.Some / Any.

Das, Meses, Nmeros y Horas.

Pronombres Personales y Pronombres

Adjetivos Posesivos y Pronombres

English Tongue Twisters

Unit Eleven ----------------------

Posesivo Apstrofe S (s).

Preguntar Pertenencia con Whose.

Verbo Let. Have para ofrecer.

In, on, at para momentos precisos.

How much para precios. Verbos

Nmeros Ordinales y sus usos.

Pasado Simple del to be.

Pasado Simple de Verbos Regulares.

Preguntas Wh- en Pasado Simple

Tag Questions. To Take idiomtico.

Futuro will y be going to.

Preguntas especificas con How

Direcciones. Verbos Preposicionales.

Tiempo Continuo en Presente y Pasado.

Tiempo Continuo con Verbos Modales.

-------------- Comparativo de Igualdad as as

Also too as well either

Fill in the blanks

Unit Thirty-one -----------------

Lectura. Prctica general

Interacciones. Preguntas y respuestas.

Lectura, entendimiento rpido y

Pronombres reflexivos. Oraciones con

Oraciones con un verbo y dos

Preguntas indirectas.Too Enough.

Expresin impersonal con It.

Cuantificadores. Could Be good at

Parts of the body.

Would para pasado. Used to get

Be going to para futuro y para pasado

Unit Eleven ---------------------

Unit Twelve ---------------------

Perfect Tense. Ever never

Simple Past vs Present Perfect.

Tiempo perfecto en progresivopresente.101

Unit Fifteen -----------------------

Concordancia de tiempos verbales. 103

Unit Sixteen ---------------------

Transitional Words and Phrases.

Reported Speech. Say - Tell

Have someone do something.

Verbo+gerundio / Verbo+gerundio o inf.

Adjetive + ed --- Adjetive + ing

Animals. Members of a Family.

Expressions with Get.